handbook of police range safety volume 2ripassetseu.s3.amazonaws.com/€¦ · handbook of police...
TRANSCRIPT
Page 1 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Version 4.4
2012 Produced on behalf of the Association of Chief Police Officers
by the National Policing Improvement Agency
Handbook of Police
Range Safety
Volume 2
Design, Construction, and Maintenance
Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Page 2 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
This practice advice/guidance contains information to assist policing in the United Kingdom.
It is not protectively marked/restricted/confidential under the Government Protective Marking Scheme.
The decision to make the content, or any part of it, publicly available or not, rests with the copyright holders. They
have agreed to make it available on condition that it is not reproduced elsewhere.
Handbook of Police Range Safety
This document has been produced by the National Policing Improvement Agency (NPIA) on behalf of the Association of Chief Police
Officers (ACPO). It will be updated according to legislative and policy changes and re-released as required.
The NPIA was established by the Police and Justice Act 2006. As part of its remit the NPIA is required to develop policing doctrine,
including practice advice, in consultation with ACPO, the Home Office and the Police Service. Practice advice produced by the NPIA
should be used by chief officers to shape police responses to ensure that the general public experience consistent levels of service.
The implementation of all practice advice will require operational choices to be made at local level in order to achieve the appropriate
police response.
All enquiries about this practice advice should be addressed to:
Uniform Operational Support
Wyboston Lakes, Great North Road, Wyboston, Bedfordshire MK44 3BY
Telephone: +44 (0) 1480 334567
Email: [email protected]
Acknowledgements
ACPO and the NPIA would like to express their thanks to all those involved in the drafting of this document who gave their advice.
All of the responses during the consultation phase of this project were appreciated and contributed to the final document.
© Association of Chief Police Officers 2012
© National Policing Improvement Agency 2012
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, modified, amended, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted,
in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of the National Policing Improvement Agency and the Association
of Chief Police Officers or their duly authorised representative.
Page 3 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CONTENTS
CONDITIONS OF RELEASE ............................................................ 20
RECORD OF CHANGES ................................................................. 21
RECORD OF LAND RANGE SAFETY SUB COMMITTEE SAFETY NOTICES22
INTRODUCTION: General ............................................................... 23
RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................... 23
ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS ........................................................ 23
SCOPE ....................................................................................... 24
SA Range Design and Construction ............................................................24
Danger Areas.............................................................................................24
Signs and Fences .......................................................................................24
Safety Standards .......................................................................................24
Targetry.....................................................................................................25
PROVISOS .................................................................................................25
RANGE INSPECTIONS ................................................................................26
TERMINOLOGY...........................................................................................26
TECHNICAL ADVISORY SECTION (ROYAL ENGINEERS) (TAS (RE))............26
Information and Advice issued by TAS (RE) ..............................................27
Proposals for amendment should be directed, through the NPIA to: .......27
ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS........................................................... 29
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................ 30
CHAPTER 1: Provision Of Ranges..................................................... 38
1.1 AIM .................................................................................... 38
1.2 RANGE GROUPING................................................................ 38
1.2.1 Grouping of Ranges ......................................................................38
1.3 PERMANENT TRAINING RANGES (PTR).................................... 39
1.3.1 Justification..................................................................................39
1.3.2 Authorisation ...............................................................................39
1.3.3 Construction.................................................................................39
1.3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES.............................................................40
1.3.5 Byelaws........................................................................................41
1.3.6 SITING BOARD .............................................................................41
Page 4 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
1.4 TEMPORARY EXERCISE RANGES (TER) .................................... 41
1.4.1 Introduction .................................................................................41
1.4.2 Authorisation ...............................................................................42
1.5 SEA AND AIR DANGER AREAS................................................ 42
1.6 WORKS PROJECTS & REFURBISHMENTS.................................. 43
1.6.1 Range Safety Criteria Check .........................................................43
1.7 SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT ................................................ 43
1.7.1 Sustainable Range Development and Use.....................................43
CHAPTER 1 Annex A: Police Procedures for the Procurement of a New Range 44
CHAPTER 2: Range Design Criteria and Specifications ........................ 46
2.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................... 46
2.1.1 AIM ..............................................................................................46
2.1.2 Categorisation of Criteria .............................................................46
2.1.3 Range Compliance Checklist.........................................................47
2.2 DEFINITIONS AND RANGE SAFETY TERMS............................... 47
2.2.1 Definitions....................................................................................47
2.2.2 Air Danger Area............................................................................47
2.2.3 Air Danger Height.........................................................................48
2.2.4 Ammunition Danger Area .............................................................49
2.2.5 Angle of Sight...............................................................................49
2.2.6 Approved Range Status ................................................................50
2.2.7 Backsplash ...................................................................................50
2.2.8 Burst Safety Distances .................................................................51
2.2.9 Clear Range Procedure .................................................................52
2.2.10 Clear Vision Line...........................................................................52
2.2.11 Cone of Fire ..................................................................................52
2.2.12 Danger Area/Zone........................................................................55
2.2.13 Danger Area Template..................................................................55
2.2.14 Danger Area Trace........................................................................56
2.2.15 Design Approval ...........................................................................56
2.2.16 Design Authorisation....................................................................56
2.2.17 Design Certification......................................................................56
2.2.18 Ground Target (also called Soft) ..................................................56
2.2.19 Hard Target ..................................................................................57
2.2.20 High Elevation Fire .......................................................................57
Page 5 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.2.21 Hill Background ............................................................................57
2.2.22 Impact Area/Zone........................................................................57
2.2.23 Jump ............................................................................................58
2.2.24 Line of Fire ...................................................................................58
2.2.25 Line of Sight .................................................................................58
2.2.26 Military Measurement...................................................................59
2.2.27 Prepared Impact Area ..................................................................59
2.2.28 Quadrant Elevation.......................................................................59
2.2.29 Range (Zone) ...............................................................................60
2.2.30 Range Authorising Officer ............................................................61
2.2.31 Range Danger Area/Zone.............................................................61
2.2.32 Range Danger Area Template .......................................................61
2.2.33 Range Danger Area Trace.............................................................62
2.2.34 Range Floor ..................................................................................62
2.2.35 Range Safety Dispensation...........................................................63
2.2.36 Ricochet .......................................................................................63
2.2.37 Small Arms ...................................................................................63
2.2.38 Tangent Elevation.........................................................................64
2.2.39 Template ......................................................................................64
2.2.40 Trace ............................................................................................64
2.2.41 Type Standard ..............................................................................64
2.2.42 Vector Angle.................................................................................64
2.2.43 Weapon .......................................................................................65
2.2.44 Weapon Danger Area/Zone ..........................................................65
2.2.45 Weapon Danger Area Template ....................................................65
2.2.46 WUF .............................................................................................65
2.3 RANGE SAFETY STANDARDS.................................................. 66
2.3.1 General.........................................................................................66
2.3.2 Design Parameters .......................................................................66
2.3.3 Accuracy of Construction..............................................................67
2.3.4 Compliant Ranges ........................................................................67
2.3.5 Maintenance.................................................................................67
2.3.6 Conduct and Training ...................................................................68
2.3.7 Population Density .......................................................................68
2.3.8 Siting Preferences ........................................................................68
2.3.9 Identification of Critical, Standard and Typical requirements......68
Page 6 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.4 LIMITATIONS OF BALLISTIC PERFORMANCE ON RANGES .......... 69
2.4.1 General.........................................................................................69
2.4.2 Weapon Performance ...................................................................69
2.4.3 Authorised SA Weapons ...............................................................70
2.4.4 Muzzle Velocity and Muzzle Energy Limitations ............................70
2.4.5 Black Powder Weapons ................................................................72
2.4.6 Jacketed and Non-Standard Bullets..............................................72
2.4.7 Conversion of Ballistic Data..........................................................72
2.4.8 Automatic Fire..............................................................................73
2.5 RANGE DIMENSIONS AND DRAWINGS .................................... 73
2.5.1 Imperial and Metric ......................................................................73
2.5.2 General.........................................................................................74
2.5.3 Type Drawings/Type Standards ...................................................74
2.5.4 Construction/Record Drawing......................................................75
2.5.5 As-Built Drawing ..........................................................................75
2.5.6 Drawings produced by TAS (RE)...................................................75
2.5.7 Range Maps:.................................................................................77
2.5.8 CHANGE RECORDS........................................................................77
2.6 RANGE TYPES ...................................................................... 78
2.6.1 Small Arms Weapon System Ranges: ...........................................78
2.7 RANGE DESIGN.................................................................... 80
2.7.1 Design Principles:.........................................................................80
2.7.2 Safe Design ..................................................................................81
2.7.3 Design Criteria .............................................................................83
2.7.4 Range Components: .....................................................................85
2.7.5 Range Materials............................................................................91
2.7.6 Materials Trials.............................................................................93
2.7.7 Maintenance.................................................................................94
2.7.8 Environmental Hazards and Sustainability ...................................94
2.7.9 Noise ............................................................................................96
2.7.10 Lead Pollution, Unburnt Propellant and Carbon Monoxide:...........97
2.7.11 Hill Backgrounds ..........................................................................97
2.8 SAND BULLET CATCHERS ...................................................... 98
2.8.1 General.........................................................................................98
2.8.2 Quality..........................................................................................98
Page 7 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.8.3 Construction.................................................................................99
2.8.4 Profile ..........................................................................................99
2.8.5 Maintenance.................................................................................99
2.9 GRANULATED RUBBER BULLET CATCHERS............................. 103
2.9.1 Material description....................................................................103
2.9.2 Environmental Impact................................................................105
2.9.3 Maintenance...............................................................................105
2.9.4 Potential Use ..............................................................................106
2.9.5 Depth of Granulate .....................................................................106
2.9.6 Disposal .....................................................................................107
2.9.7 Contact Details ...........................................................................107
2.10 IMPACT AREAS .................................................................. 107
2.10.1 IMPACT AREAS - General............................................................107
2.10.2 Closed Impact Area ....................................................................108
2.10.3 Controlled Impact Area .............................................................108
2.10.4 Open Impact Area .....................................................................109
2.10.5 Impact Area Siting ....................................................................109
2.10.6 Firing Points ..............................................................................109
2.10.7 Gates.........................................................................................110
2.11. CONTROL OF ACCESS ..................................................... 111
2.11.1 General.......................................................................................111
2.12 FENCES............................................................................. 111
2.12.1 Classes of Fences ......................................................................111
2.12.2 Selection ...................................................................................112
2.12.3 Demarcation..............................................................................112
2.12.4 To Discourage Access ................................................................113
2.12.5 To Prevent Access .....................................................................113
2.13 SIGNS AND NOTICES.......................................................... 114
2.13.1 General......................................................................................114
2.13.2 Police Policy and Current Legislation.........................................114
2.13.3 Definitions and References........................................................115
2.13.4 Shape and Colour of Safety Signs ..............................................117
2.13.5 Approved Signs .........................................................................117
2.13.6 Supplementary Text and Notices ...............................................118
2.13.7 Lettering Style...........................................................................119
Page 8 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.13.8 Sign Size....................................................................................119
2.13.9 Positioning of Signs...................................................................119
2.13.10 Retrospective Action. ..............................................................120
2.13.11 Boundary Responsibility .........................................................120
2.14 FLAGGING / RED LIGHTS .................................................... 120
2.14.1 General......................................................................................120
2.15 SURVEILLANCE AND SENTRIES ............................................ 121
2.16 WORKS RANGE STRUCTURE INSPECTIONS............................ 121
CHAPTER 3: Indoor Ranges .......................................................... 137
3.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 137
3.1.1 Aim.............................................................................................137
3.1.2 Description.................................................................................137
3.1.3 Purpose ......................................................................................137
3.1.4 Environmental Issues.................................................................138
3.2 DESIGN............................................................................. 138
3.2.1 General.......................................................................................138
3.2.2 Components ...............................................................................138
3.2.3 Component sizes ........................................................................139
3.2.4 Design ........................................................................................140
3.2.5 Backsplash hazard......................................................................141
3.3 CONSTRUCTION................................................................. 141
3.3.1 RANGE BUILDING.......................................................................141
3.3.2 Adjoining Rooms ........................................................................141
3.3.3 Doors and Windows....................................................................142
3.3.4 Ventilation..................................................................................143
3.3.5 Dust Control ...............................................................................143
3.3.6 Safety Signs ...............................................................................143
3.4 DEFENCE ZONE.................................................................. 144
3.4.1 Requirements.............................................................................144
3.4.2 Fixings........................................................................................144
3.5 BACKPLATE........................................................................ 144
3.6 BULLET CATCHER ............................................................... 145
3.6.1 The Sand Bullet Catcher (LV and HV) .........................................146
3.6.2 Vertical Steel Plate with Anti-Splash Curtain (LV ONLY) ............146
Page 9 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.6.3 Angled Steel Plate with Anti-Splash Curtain (LV ONLY)..............146
3.6.4 Snail Bullet Trap (LV AND HV)....................................................147
3.6.5 Granulated Rubber Traps (LV AND HV) ......................................147
3.6.6 Other Bullet Catcher Systems.....................................................147
3.7 ANTI-SPLASH CURTAIN ....................................................... 148
3.7.1 Material ......................................................................................148
3.7.2 Fixing .........................................................................................149
3.7.3 Pelmet........................................................................................150
3.7.4 Anti-Splash Curtain Repair .........................................................150
3.8 TARGETRY ......................................................................... 151
3.8.1 Targets.......................................................................................151
3.8.2 Target Mechanisms ....................................................................151
3.8.3 Moving Targets...........................................................................151
3.8.4 Target Positions .........................................................................152
3.8.5 Target Lighting...........................................................................152
3.9 FLOOR .............................................................................. 152
3.9.1 Lower Clear Vision Line ..............................................................153
3.10 WALLS .............................................................................. 153
3.10.1 Walls and Sound Attenuation. ...................................................153
3.11 CEILING ............................................................................ 154
3.11.1 Ceiling or Roof and Upper Clear Vision Line...............................154
3.11.2 Sound Attenuation.....................................................................154
3.12 BAFFLES............................................................................ 154
3.12.1 Purpose .....................................................................................154
3.12.2 Locations...................................................................................155
3.12.3 Angled Baffles ............................................................................155
3.12.4 Materials ...................................................................................156
3.13 FIRING POINTS AND LANES................................................. 156
3.13.1 Firing Points ..............................................................................156
3.13.2 Pistol Benches or Ricochet Protection .......................................156
3.13.3 Firing Lanes...............................................................................157
3.13.4 Firing Lane Width ......................................................................157
3.14 FIRE HAZARD..................................................................... 158
3.14.1 Hazards .....................................................................................158
3.14.2 Approval....................................................................................158
Page 10 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.15 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................. 158
3.16 MAINTENANCE ................................................................... 159
3.16.1 Responsibilities .........................................................................159
3.16.2 Frequency..................................................................................159
3.16.3 Range Cleaning .........................................................................160
3.16.4 Bullet Catcher............................................................................160
3.16.5 Range Structure ........................................................................160
3.17 COMPLIANCE CHECKS......................................................... 160
CHAPTER 4: Open Non Standard No Danger Area Range .................. 170
4.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 170
4.1.1 General......................................................................................170
4.2 DESIGN PROCEDURES (NEW OR MODIFIED RANGES) ............. 170
4.2.1 Range Safety Advice..................................................................170
4.2.2 Structural Advice.......................................................................171
4.2.3 Preliminary Planning .................................................................171
4.3 DESIGN............................................................................. 171
4.3.1 Siting.........................................................................................171
4.3.2 Range Components....................................................................173
4.3.3 Component Design. ...................................................................175
4.4 CONSTRUCTION................................................................. 176
4.4.1 Firing Point................................................................................176
4.4.2 Targets ......................................................................................177
4.4.3 Range Floor ...............................................................................177
4.4.4 Bullet Catcher............................................................................178
4.4.5 Stop Butt ...................................................................................179
4.5 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................. 181
4.5.1 External.....................................................................................181
4.5.2 Internal .....................................................................................181
4.6 MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 182
4.6.1 Range Profile Survey ..................................................................182
4.6.2 Responsibilities .........................................................................182
4.6.3 Frequency..................................................................................183
4.6.4 Bullet Catcher............................................................................183
4.6.5 Hidden Attrition..........................................................................183
Page 11 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
4.7 COMPLIANCE CHECKS......................................................... 183
CHAPTER 5: The Close Quarter Combat Range (Urban) – CQCR (u) ... 185
5.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 185
5.1.1 Aim............................................................................................185
5.1.2 Description ................................................................................185
5.1.3 Purpose .....................................................................................186
5.2 DANGER AREAS ................................................................. 186
5.2.1 Templates..................................................................................186
5.3 DESIGN............................................................................. 186
5.3.1 General Concepts ......................................................................186
5.3.2 Physical Considerations.............................................................187
5.3.3 Siting.........................................................................................187
5.3.4 Layout .......................................................................................187
5.3.5 Special Effects ...........................................................................188
5.3.6 DEFENCE STRUCTURE SIZES......................................................189
5.3.7 OVERHEAD GANTRIES ...............................................................189
5.4 RANGE OPTIONS ................................................................ 189
5.4.1 Outdoor open range Live Fire Tactical Training Areas (LFTTAs) 189
5.4.2 Outdoor No Danger Area (NDA) and Indoor CQCR (U) range.....191
5.5 CONSTRUCTION................................................................. 191
5.5.1 Materials ...................................................................................191
5.5.2 Targetry ....................................................................................191
5.5.3 Ballistic wall options .................................................................191
5.5.4 Bullet trap options.....................................................................195
5.5.5 Method of Entry (MoE) Techniques............................................196
5.5.6 Closed Circuit Television and Public Address Installation..........196
5.5.7 Range Control............................................................................196
5.5.8 Electricity and Water .................................................................197
5.5.9 Ancillary Buildings.....................................................................197
5.6 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................. 197
5.6.1 External.....................................................................................197
5.6.2 Internal .....................................................................................197
5.7 MAINTENANCE ................................................................... 198
5.7.1 Responsibilities .........................................................................198
5.7.2 Frequency..................................................................................199
Page 12 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 5 ANNEX A: Additional Details For CQB (U) Shoot Through LFTT Facilities
200
CHAPTER 6: The 1908 Design Barrack Range.................................. 203
6.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 203
6.1.1 Description ................................................................................203
6.1.2 Purpose .....................................................................................203
6.2 DESIGN............................................................................. 204
6.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................204
6.2.2 Back-to-Back Ranges.................................................................205
6.2.3 SA Limitations ...........................................................................205
6.2.4 Shot Guns..................................................................................206
6.2.5 Mantlets ....................................................................................206
6.3 CONSTRUCTION................................................................ 206
6.3.1 Stop Butt Wall ...........................................................................206
6.3.2 Bullet Catcher............................................................................207
6.3.3 Canopy ......................................................................................207
6.3.4 Targets ......................................................................................208
6.3.5 Turning Target Mechanisms ......................................................208
6.3.6 Target Positions ........................................................................208
6.4 RANGE FLOOR.................................................................... 209
6.4.1 Ricochet Pit ...............................................................................209
6.4.2 Configuration ............................................................................209
6.4.3 Side Walls and Banks ................................................................210
6.4.4 Fences and Signs.......................................................................210
6.5 FIRING POINTS .................................................................. 211
6.5.1 25 m Firing Points .....................................................................211
6.5.2 Other Firing Points ....................................................................211
6.5.3 Distance and Lane Markers........................................................211
6.6 LIGHTING.......................................................................... 211
6.7 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................. 211
6.8 MAINTENANCE ................................................................... 212
6.8.1 Frequency..................................................................................212
6.8.2 Stop Butt Wall ...........................................................................213
6.8.3 Bullet Catcher............................................................................213
Page 13 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 7: Tube Ranges............................................................. 216
7.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 216
7.2 Description ........................................................................ 216
7.3 Purpose............................................................................. 217
7.4 DESIGN............................................................................. 217
7.4.1 Design Criteria ...........................................................................217
7.4.2 Siting..........................................................................................218
7.5 CONSTRUCTION - TARGET HOUSE........................................ 218
7.5.1 Bullet Catchers ...........................................................................218
7.5.2 Defence Zone .............................................................................220
7.5.3 Targetry Selection ......................................................................220
7.5.4 Ricochet and Backsplash ............................................................221
7.5.5 Target Illumination ....................................................................221
7.5.6 Size ............................................................................................221
7.5.7 Laying ........................................................................................222
7.5.8 Earth Cover ................................................................................222
7.5.9 Lighting ......................................................................................223
7.5.10 Weapon Muzzle Limit..................................................................223
7.6 CONSTRUCTION - FIRING BAY ............................................. 223
7.6.1 Firing Points ...............................................................................223
7.6.2 Screens ......................................................................................224
7.6.3 Floor Finish ................................................................................224
7.6.4 Pistol Firing Points .....................................................................224
7.6.5 Intermediate Firing Distances ....................................................225
7.6.6 Firing Point Chamber..................................................................226
7.6.7 Lighting ......................................................................................226
7.6.8 Control, Waiting and Assembly Rooms .......................................226
7.7 SAFETY MEASURES............................................................. 226
7.7.1 Access ........................................................................................226
7.7.2 Entrances ...................................................................................227
7.7.3 Shields .......................................................................................227
7.7.4 Noise ..........................................................................................227
7.7.5 Ventilation..................................................................................228
7.7.6 Fire Hazard.................................................................................228
7.7.7 Fire Approval..............................................................................228
Page 14 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
7.7.8 Eye Protection ............................................................................228
7.8 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................. 229
7.8.1 External......................................................................................229
7.8.2 Internal ......................................................................................229
7.9 SAFETY SIGNS ................................................................... 229
7.9.1 Safety Signs ...............................................................................229
7.10 MAINTENANCE ................................................................... 230
7.10.1 General......................................................................................230
7.10.2 Bullet Catchers ..........................................................................230
7.10.3 Responsibilities .........................................................................231
7.10.4 Frequency..................................................................................231
7.11 COMPLIANCE CHECKS......................................................... 232
7.11.1 The following should be checked...............................................232
CHAPTER 8: The Gallery Range Imperial & Metric ............................ 235
8.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 235
8.2 Aim .................................................................................. 235
8.3 Purpose............................................................................. 235
8.4 DANGER AREAS ................................................................. 236
8.4.1 DA Categories............................................................................236
8.4.2 Combined Gallery DA Trace .......................................................237
8.4.3 SA Tracer Ammunition...............................................................237
8.4.4 Other Factors ............................................................................238
8.4.5 Pistol AND SHOTGUN Practices on a GR.....................................239
8.5 DESIGN............................................................................. 239
8.5.1 Principles ..................................................................................239
8.5.2 Siting.........................................................................................241
8.5.3 Worst Case Lines of Sight ..........................................................241
8.6 CONSTRUCTION - STOP BUTT.............................................. 242
8.6.1 Purpose .....................................................................................242
8.6.2 Location ....................................................................................242
8.6.3 Structure ...................................................................................243
8.6.4 Height .......................................................................................243
8.6.5 Crest Length and Width.............................................................243
8.6.6 Profile .......................................................................................244
Page 15 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.6.7 Bullet Catcher or Material Boxes ...............................................244
8.6.8 Flag Poles and Lights.................................................................245
8.6.9 Lane Numbers ...........................................................................245
8.6.10 Terracing....................................................................................245
8.7 MARKERS' GALLERY............................................................ 246
8.7.1 General......................................................................................246
8.7.2 Construction..............................................................................247
8.7.3 Fixtures .....................................................................................247
8.7.4 Target Spacing ..........................................................................247
8.7.5 Target and Target Frames .........................................................248
8.8 MANTLET.......................................................................... 248
8.8.1 Length and Height .....................................................................248
8.8.2 Construction..............................................................................249
8.8.3 Falling Plate Targets..................................................................249
8.9 TARGET STORE and WORKSHOP .......................................... 250
8.10 RANGE FLOOR.................................................................... 250
8.10.1 Levelling.....................................................................................250
8.10.2 Distance and Lane Markers.........................................................251
8.11 FIRING POINTS .................................................................. 251
8.11.1 Construction...............................................................................251
8.11.2 Surfaces .....................................................................................251
8.11.3 Fire Trenches..............................................................................251
8.12 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................. 252
8.12.1 External......................................................................................252
8.12.2 Internal ......................................................................................252
8.13 MAINTENANCE ................................................................... 253
8.13.1 Range Profile Survey ..................................................................253
8.13.2 Responsibilities ..........................................................................253
8.13.3 Frequency ..................................................................................253
8.13.4 Bullet Catcher.............................................................................254
8.13.5 Mantlet Scooping........................................................................254
8.14 COMPLIANCE CHECKS......................................................... 254
CHAPTER 9: The Converted Gallery Range And Electric Target (Limited Danger
Area) Range ................................................................................ 271
Page 16 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
9.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 271
9.2 Aim .................................................................................. 271
9.3 CONVERSION CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL ............................ 272
9.3.1 Design Considerations...............................................................272
9.3.2 Land Requirements ...................................................................272
9.3.3 Conversion ................................................................................272
9.3.4 Layout for Automatic Marking System.......................................273
9.4 MANTLET........................................................................... 273
9.4.1 LofS Clearance...........................................................................274
9.5 STOP BUTT ........................................................................ 275
9.6 TARGETRY ......................................................................... 275
9.6.1 Targets ......................................................................................275
9.6.2 Fixed Electric Target Locations..................................................275
9.6.3 Protection..................................................................................275
9.6.4 Access .......................................................................................276
9.6.5 Target Store and Workshop.......................................................276
9.7 CONTROL BUILDING ........................................................... 277
9.7.1 Purpose .....................................................................................277
9.7.2 Location ....................................................................................277
9.7.3 Construction..............................................................................277
9.7.4 Warning Flags and Lights ..........................................................278
9.8 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY .......................................................... 278
9.8.1 Electricity Supply.......................................................................278
9.8.2 Fixed Electric Target..................................................................279
9.9 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................. 279
9.9.1 External.....................................................................................279
9.9.2 Internal .....................................................................................279
9.9.3 Public Address System ..............................................................280
9.9.4 Protection..................................................................................280
9.10 MAINTENANCE ................................................................... 280
9.10.1 Responsibilities ..........................................................................280
9.10.2 Frequency ..................................................................................281
9.11 COMPLIANCE CHECKS......................................................... 281
CHAPTER 10: Targetry ................................................................. 286
Page 17 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
10.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 286
10.2 Definitions ......................................................................... 286
10.3 Design Criteria ................................................................... 287
10.4 PROVISION........................................................................ 287
10.4.1 Target Mechanisms and Support Systems .................................287
10.4.2 Repair and Maintenance ............................................................287
10.5 FIGURE TARGET MECHANISMS STATIC ................................. 288
10.5.1 Fixed Electric Target (FET) .......................................................288
10.5.2 Electric Swivel Target Equipments.............................................289
10.5.3 Portable Radio-Operated Target Equipments.............................289
10.5.4 Portable Cable Operated Equipment ..........................................290
10.6 TARGETS AND ACCESSORIES ............................................. 291
10.6.1 Figure Targets ...........................................................................291
10.6.2 1.22 m2 and 1.83 m2 Screen Targets ........................................292
10.6.3 Representative Sizes .................................................................292
10.6.4 Falling Plates.............................................................................293
10.6.5 Target Shooters Zeroing Targets (NRA)........................................293
10.7 TARGET HOLDINGS ............................................................ 294
10.8 MAINTENANCE ................................................................... 294
10.8.1 Responsibilities .........................................................................294
CHAPTER 11: Control Of Hazardous Substances In Indoor Ranges..... 300
11.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 300
11.1.1 Environmental Health Hazards Covered.....................................300
11.2 HAZARDS .......................................................................... 300
11.2.1 Lead ..........................................................................................300
11.2.2 Unburnt Propellant ....................................................................301
11.2.3 Accumulated Dust .....................................................................301
11.2.4 Carbon Monoxide.......................................................................302
11.3 UK REGULATIONS .............................................................. 302
11.3.1 Control of Lead at Work (CLAW) Regulations ............................302
11.3.2 Carbon Monoxide (CO) ..............................................................304
11.3.3 Category of User........................................................................304
11.3.4 Level of Exposure to Lead..........................................................305
11.4 ASSESSMENT..................................................................... 305
Page 18 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.4.1 CHIEF FIREARMS INSTRUCTOR (CFI) Responsibilities ..............305
11.4.2 Factors Included in the Assessment ..........................................306
11.5 AIR MONITORING............................................................... 306
11.5.1 Requirement..............................................................................306
11.5.2 Air Monitoring ...........................................................................307
11.5.3 Recording Results......................................................................307
11.5.4 Significant Levels of Lead in Air.................................................307
11.5.5 Significant Levels of CO.............................................................307
11.6 RESPONSIBILITIES............................................................. 308
11.6.1 CFI ............................................................................................308
11.7 RANGE DESIGN.................................................................. 309
11.7.1 Design Concept..........................................................................309
11.7.2 Design Solution .........................................................................309
11.7.3 Air Flow Within the Range .........................................................309
11.7.4 Air Speed...................................................................................310
11.7.5 Air Changes ...............................................................................310
11.8 AIR EXTRACTION................................................................ 311
11.8.1 Extraction System .....................................................................311
11.8.2 Extract Filter .............................................................................311
11.9 INSPECTION, CLEANING, HYGIENE, RECORDS AND SIGNS INSPECTION
311
11.9.1 Inspection of Ranges Used for Firing.........................................311
11.9.2 Dust...........................................................................................312
11.9.3 Confined Spaces ........................................................................312
11.10 RANGE CLEANING .......................................................... 313
11.10.1 Scope ......................................................................................313
11.10.2 Frequency of Cleaning.............................................................313
11.10.3 Cleaning Methods....................................................................314
11.10.4 Dual Use Facilities...................................................................316
11.10.5 Personnel Involved in Cleaning...............................................316
11.10.6 Waste Disposal. ......................................................................316
11.11 HEALTH & HYGIENE ........................................................ 318
11.11.1 Washing..................................................................................318
11.11.2 Eating, Drinking and Smoking .................................................318
11.11.3 Personal Protective Equipment ...............................................318
Page 19 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.11.4 Additional Measures for Minors...............................................319
11.12 KEEPING OF RECORDS.................................................... 319
11.12.1 Records...................................................................................319
11.13 SAFETY SIGNS ............................................................... 320
11.13.1 Safety Signs ............................................................................320
Chapter 11 Annex A: Guidelines For Deep Cleaning Contracts ........... 321
CHAPTER 12: Weapon Unloading Facilities (Wuf) ............................. 324
12.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 324
12.2 Purpose............................................................................. 324
12.3 Limitations......................................................................... 324
12.4 UNLOADING FACILITY CONSTRUCTION................................. 324
12.4.1 Siting.........................................................................................324
12.4.2 Facility Materials .......................................................................325
12.4.3 Bullet Catcher............................................................................325
12.4.4 Cladding ....................................................................................325
12.5 PORTABLE UNLOADING FACILITY ......................................... 326
12.6 DESIGN............................................................................. 326
CHAPTER 13: CONTROL OF NOISE FROM SMALL ARMS RANGES....... 328
13.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................. 328
13.2 NOISE AT WORK. ............................................................... 328
13.2.1 Indoor Ranges............................................................................328
13.3 ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE ..................................................... 329
13.3.1 The Environmental Issue ..............................................................329
13.3.2 The Nugent Rule (Historical Reference)........................................330
13.4 NOISE SOURCE.................................................................. 331
13.4.1 Sound in the Open Air. ..................................................................331
13.5 NATURAL DISSIPATION....................................................... 332
13.5.1 Attenuation in Open Air ................................................................332
13.5.2 Attenuation from existing Screens and Barriers............................332
13.6 NATURAL & ENGINEERING CONTROLS .................................. 332
13.6.1 Distance........................................................................................332
13.6.2 Ground Absorption........................................................................333
13.6.3 Trees.............................................................................................333
Page 20 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
13.6.4 Earth Banks .................................................................................333
13.6.5 Wind And Turbulence....................................................................334
13.6.6 Temperature and Humidity ...........................................................335
13.6.7 Temperature Gradients .................................................................335
13.6.8 THEORETICAL PREDICTION ..........................................................335
13.7 GERMAN RANGE NOISE BAFFLE SOLUTIONS.......................... 336
Chapter 13 Annex A...................................................................... 338
MEASUREMENTS OF PEAK PRESSURE LEVELS (Db) AND PULSE DURATION
(MILLISECONDS) FOR TYPICAL WEAPON SYSTEMS........................ 338
Chapter 13 Annex B...................................................................... 339
NOISE SURVEY RESULTS FOR A TYPICAL HIGH VELOCITY INDOOR TUBE RANGE
339
CONDITIONS OF RELEASE
© NPIA (National Policing Improvement Agency) 2011 All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Crown Copyright. No part of this publication may be reproduced, modified, amended, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of the National Policing Improvement Agency or its representative. For additional copies, or to enquire about the content of the document, please contact
Page 21 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
RECORD OF CHANGES
CHANGE
NUMBER
DATE OF
CHANGE
3.8 April 09
3.9 June 09
3.10 August 09
3.11 August 09
3.12/13 October 09
3.14 Feb 10
3.15 Dec 10
4.0 Feb 11
4.1 Apr 11
4.2 May 11
4.3 April 12
4.4 May 12
Page 22 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
RECORD OF LAND RANGE SAFETY SUB COMMITTEE SAFETY NOTICES
Safety
Notice
Number
Date Of
Notice
Title Of Notice Inserted By Superseded By
Page 23 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
INTRODUCTION: General
The aim of HPRS Volume 2 is to give:
Advice to those personnel in the Police Force and contractors who are responsible
for planning, designing, constructing maintaining and inspecting Small Arms
Ranges.
Practical guidance on design, construction and maintenance standards of such
ranges to ensure realistic but safe training in firing and the best possible use of the
range space.
RESPONSIBILITIES
All the Volumes of HPRS are sponsored by the NPIA. Authority for the content of
this Volume is vested, by the NPIA, in the Chairman of the Police Ranges Working
Party (PRWP). Chairman PRWP will always take into account approvals given by
Police authorities and the advice of Subject Matter Experts (SME).
ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS
This Volume should be read in conjunction with HPRS Volume 1. Reference will also
be necessary at times to the associated publications listed on page 29 of this
Volume. For completeness, Ordnance Board Proceedings (OB Procs) Members
Letters (ML) and DOSG Advice are referred to, since they are the formal advice on
ballistics and matters related to range safety.
The Handbook of Police Range Safety Vol. 1&2 has been produced specifically for
the needs of the Police service. Wherever a criteria discrepancy exists, this police
handbook will take precedence over MoD JSP 403, for police use.
Page 24 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
SCOPE
SA RANGE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
This Volume explains in detail the design and construction of standard and non-
standard Ranges. The Volume does not deal with the conduct of firing on these
ranges or the application of Weapon Danger Area (WDA) templates, both of which
are covered in the NPFTC.
DANGER AREAS
It contains the Range Danger Area (RDA) and WDA templates approved for Police
use. The authority for taking a DA template into use rests with the respective
Integrated Project Team (IPT) in accordance with HPRS Volume 1.
SIGNS AND FENCES
Danger area signs and fences specified in Chapter 2 of this Volume apply to all
Ranges and training areas.
SAFETY STANDARDS
The safety standards set out in this Volume provide the minimum acceptable levels
of design and construction which are to be achieved. Should the minimum
standards for a range to be categorised as Compliant not be met, firing must not
take place without a Dispensation or Approved Range status being authorised (see
HPRS Volume 1).
Page 25 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
TARGETRY
The targetry approved for Police use is described in Chapter 10.
PROVISOS
The whole basis of this Volume rests on the premise that:
• Training is completed prior to firing in accordance with appropriate Police
training directives.
• Only Police Approved Weapons and ammunition, the limitations of which are
given in Chapter 2, page 71, para 2.4.4, Table 4 may be used. Other
weapons and ammunition may be used as static single shot marksmanship
practices but must be within the ME and MV limitations set out in this
Volume.
• Note 1: Police Approved Weapons are those that have a Safety Case and
WDA issued by the respective Integrated Project Team (IPT).
• The ranges are run as directed by the practices, conduct and safety rules set
out in Reference C1 (NPFTC) or other Police directives authorised at not less
than CC level.
• Firing is under the direction of a current and competent Range Conducting
Officer (RCO).
• Ranges are maintained and inspected in accordance with current regulations.
Page 26 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
RANGE INSPECTIONS
This Volume may be used to assist in inspecting SA Ranges. The construction
characteristics of a particular range may differ considerably from the detail
illustrated in this HPRS. In all cases the principles, policy and criteria contained in
this HPRS should be applied. Advice should always be sought from TAS (RE) where
there is any doubt on the safety of a range.
TERMINOLOGY
The weapon categories of fullbore and smallbore are not used in this Volume as
they are calibre related and do not account for weapon performance. SA munitions
are categorised as high velocity (HV) or low velocity (LV) which enables
performance to be expressed in muzzle velocity (MV) or muzzle energy (ME).
Ranges are designed for specific maximum levels of MV and ME, which are stated in
the relevant chapters that follow.
TECHNICAL ADVISORY SECTION (ROYAL ENGINEERS) (TAS (RE)).
TAS (RE) is referred to throughout this Volume. It is part of the MOD Defence
Training Estate (DTE) and provides authoritative, specific advice on range design
and construction. Advice is also available from OC TAS (RE) on general principles
and policy contained in this HPRS. TAS (RE)’s address is:
TAS (RE), Defence Training Estate Blenheim Hall Land Warfare Centre WARMINSTER Wilts BA12 0DJ Contact: Technical Officer 01985 22 2434 DTO – Police ranges 01985 22 2433
Page 27 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
INFORMATION AND ADVICE ISSUED BY TAS (RE)
From time to time TAS (RE) produces the following advice:
• Type Standards: Performance specifications aimed at contractors involved
in the development of a range. A Type standard will be developed from this
HPRS for each range type. Progress of this work is recorded in Police Range
Working Party (PRWP) Minutes.
• Range Advice Notes: Issued from time to time to explain and clarify range
safety or construction issues that do not directly affect the safety of a range.
Safety issues are covered by Range Safety Notices, issued by PRWP.
• Technical Data Sheets (TDS): Internal research covering many aspects
contained in HPRS not issued but available if required. Contact AO TAS (RE)
on 01985 22 2433 for information relating to existing TDS.
PROPOSALS FOR AMENDMENT SHOULD BE DIRECTED, THROUGH THE NPIA TO:
Proposals for amendment should be directed, through the NPIA to:
Secretary Land Ranges Working Party OC TAS (RE) Defence Training Estate Blenheim Hall Land Warfare Centre WARMINSTER Wilts BA12 0DJ Telephone: 01985 222434 Fax: 01985 222259 to whom queries should also be addressed, with information copies to:
Page 28 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
The Secretary of the Defence Land Ranges Safety Committee Birch 3a Police Abbey Wood #3323 Bristol BS34 8JH email: [email protected]
Page 29 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS
Where an associated publication is referred to in this Volume or any other Volume
of HPRS it is to be taken as the authoritative document on the subject.
Reference Code Title
A1 HPRS Vol 1 Range Safety Handbook Volume I – Range Management (Policy, Responsibilities, Authorisation, Use, Maintenance and Inspection of Police Ranges).
B1 NPFTC National Police Firearms Training Curriculum
Page 30 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
ABBREVIATIONS
AAAD All Arms Air Defence
AC Alternating Current
ACOP Approved Code of Practice
ADA Air Danger Area - also Ammunition Danger Area (obsolete)
ADH Air Danger Height
AF Army Form
AFV Armoured Fighting Vehicle
AGL Above Ground Level
AIS Aeronautical Information Services
ALARP As Low As Reasonably Possible
AMS Automatic Marking System
AMSL Above Mean Sea Level
AofS Angle of Sight
AOSP Army Operational Shooting Policy
APWT Annual Personal Weapon Test
ARA Army Rifle Association
ATO Ammunition Technical Officer
BS British Standard
BSD Burst Safety Distance
C Centigrade
CAA Civil Aviation Authority
CC Chief Constable
CCTV Close Circuit Television
CES Complete Equipment Schedule
CFI Chief Firearms Instructor
CGR Converted Gallery Range
Page 31 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Ch Charge
CL Centre Line
CLAW Control of Lead at Work
CNWR Control of Noise at Work Regs.
CO Commanding Officer
C of F Cone of Fire
COP Code of Practice
CP Control Post
CQB Close Quarter Battle
CQBR(U) Close Quarter Battle Range (Urban)
CTTE Cine Target Training Equipment
DA/Z Danger Area/Zone
DAUG See UK DAUG
DC Direct Current
ED Estates Department
DE&S Defence Equipment and Support
DEC (DEB) Director of Equipment Capability (Direct Battlefield Engagement)
DEF STAN Defence Standard
DE Defence Estates
Dia Diameter
Dist District
Div Division
DOSG Defence Ordnance Group
EASI Electronic Automatic Sequence Initiator
ED Estates Department
EEC European Economic Community
EFS Enemy Fire Simulators
EHO Environmental Health Officer
EHT Environmental Health Team
EM Equipment Manager
Page 32 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
ENO Environmental Noise Officer
ET(LDA)R Electric Target (Limited Danger Area) Range
ETR Electric Target Range
EWC Establishment Works Consultant
FDA Full Danger Area
FET Fixed Electric Target
FFA Field Firing Area
Fig Figure
FMX Fire and Manoeuvre Exercise
FOST Flag Officer Sea Training
FOSM Flag Officer Submarines
FP Firing Point
ft Foot/Feet
ft lb Foot Pound
ft/sec Foot second(s)
g Gram(s)
gr Grain(s)
GR Gallery Range
GRP Glass Reinforced Plastic
G&Z Grouping and Zeroing
HQ Headquarters
HSE Health and Safety Executive
HT/ht Height
HV High Velocity
H&S Health and Safety
Hz Hertz
Illum Illuminating
in Inch(es)
IP Identified Project
IPT Integrated Project Team
Page 33 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
IR Infra-red
ITTR Indoor Training Theatre Range
IWS Infantry Weapon System
J Joule(s)
JSP Joint Service Publication
kg Kilogram(s)
kt Knot(s)
kph Kilometres per Hour
kVA Kilovolt Amperes
LANDSO Land (Command) Standing Order
lb Pound(s)
LDA Limited Danger Area
LFTTA Live Fire Tactical Training Area
LH Left Hand
LNV Limit of Night Visibility
LofF Line of Fire
LofS Line of Sight
LPA Local Planning Authority
LRR Long Range Rifle
LRSSC Land Ranges Safety Sub Committee
LRWP Land Range Working Party.
LSW Light Support Weapons
LTC Long Term Costings
LUMAT Limitations in the Use of Missiles and Ammunition for Training
LV Low Velocity
LWC Land Warfare Centre
m Metre(s)
max Maximum
ME Muzzle Energy (in joules (J))
mg Milligram
Page 34 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
MHE Materials Handling Equipment
min Minimum
Mk Mark
ML Member’s Letter (OB)
mm Millimetre(s)
MMTTR Mechanized Moving Target Trainer Range
MOD Ministry of Defence
mph Miles per Hour
MPI Mean Point of Impact
MTS(R) Moving Target System (Rural)
MS Mild Steel
m/sec Metres per Second
MSL Mean Sea Level
MV Muzzle Velocity (in m/s)
N Newton(s)
NBSD Normal Burst Safety Distance
NDA No Danger Area
No. Number
NOTAM Notice to Airmen
NPFTC National Police Firearms Training Curriculum
NRA National Rifle Association
NSN NATO Stock Number
NSRA National Smallbore Rifle Association
OB Ordnance Board
OB Proc Ordnance Board Proceeding
OEL Occupational Exposure Limit
OIBUA Operating in built-up areas
OOB Out of Bounds
OP Observation Post
OTR Operational Theatre Range
Page 35 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
PA Public Address
Pam Pamphlet
PE Probable Error
PM Project Manager
POD Protected Observation Down-range
PPE Personal Protection Equipment
PROM Property Management
PRWP Police Ranges Working Party
PS Project Sponsor
PTE Pre-Tender Estimates
PTR Permanent Training Range
QE Quadrant Elevation
RAF Royal Air Force
RAO Range Authorising Officer
RAU Range Administrative Unit
RBSD Reduced Burst Safety Distance
RCO Range Conducting Officer
RDA Range Danger Area
RE Royal Engineers
RF Radio frequency
RFCA Reserve Forces & Cadet Associations
RH Right Hand
ROC Rough Order Cost(s)
RPC Regional Prime Contractor
RSPSC Range Safety Policy Sub-Committee
RT Reverberation Time
RTAAB Ranges and Training Area Audit Board
RTADB Ranges and Training Areas Development Board
SA Small Arm
SASC Small Arms School Corps
Page 36 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
SC105A Concrete Post
SCOC Supply Chain Operations Centre
SCOTS(A) Standing Committee On Training Safety (Army)
SDA Sea Danger Area
SF Special Forces
SHEF Safety Health Environment and Fire
SK Sketch
SME Subject Matter Expert
SMG Sub-Machine Gun
Smk Smoke
SO Standing Orders
SOPs Standard Operating Procedures
SOR Statement of Requirement
STA & SPSS Surveillance, Target Acquisition and Special Project Support
Systems
STP Short Term Plan (was LTC)
STPS Static Target Projection System
SS1 05A Steel Post
SW105A Wooden Post
SWO Staff Warfare Officer
TAG SASC Training Advisory Group Small Arms School Corps
TAN Tangent (trigonometric)
TAS (RE) Technical Advisory Section (Royal Engineers)
TAVRA Territorial, Auxiliary and Volunteer Reserve Association
TB Technical Bulletin
TE Tangent Elevation
TER Temporary Exercise Range
Tgty Targetry
TO Technical Office(r)
TOPL Training On Private Land
Page 37 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
TP&N Triple Phase and Neutral
TWA Time Weighted Average
UK United Kingdom
UK DAUG United Kingdom Danger Area User Group
USA United States of America
UXO Unexploded Ordnance
V Volt(s)
VHI Visual Hit Indicators
Vol Volume
VTT Video Target Trainer
WBP Water and Boil Proof grade Plywood
WDA Lab Weapon Danger Area Laboratory
WDA/Z Weapon Danger Area/Zone
WS Weapon System
Yd Yard(s)
Page 38 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 1: Provision Of Ranges
1.1 AIM
The aim of this chapter is to outline the procedures for the justification,
authorisation, funding, construction and site selection of Police Small Arms Systems
Ranges (SA Ranges). General policy is given in HPRS Volume 1.
1.2 RANGE GROUPING
1.2.1 GROUPING OF RANGES
SA ranges may be, or are regarded as being, one of the following:
• Permanent Training Range: A Permanent Training Range (PTR) may be in
a police establishment, on a training area or on a Live Fire Tactical Training
Area (LFTTA). The range can be indoor or outdoor (open), static or mobile,
may require specific construction, and can be grouped to form a range
complex.
• Temporary Exercise Range: A Temporary Exercise Range (TER) is one
created for the duration of an exercise or for a specified period. The range will
normally be located on an existing LFTTA with the TER Danger Area (DA)
falling within an existing Range Danger Area (RDA) which has been
authorised for the required weapons, or on land cleared for a specified use
with the local authorities and made safe for firing with its own authorised DA
trace defining the restricted area. HPRS Volume 1 provides guidance on the
conditions under which a TER may be established.
Page 39 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
1.3 PERMANENT TRAINING RANGES (PTR)
1.3.1 JUSTIFICATION
PTRs are initiated by a Statement of Requirement (SOR) and authorised in
accordance with the procedures detailed in HPRS Volume I Chapter 6.
1.3.2 AUTHORISATION
For authority to construct a new PTR forces should follow individual force funding
procedures. It will be built to approved Police Type Standards or as detailed in this
Volume. Type Standards are produced and held by TAS (RE). Project Sponsors or
Property Managers are to co-ordinate the planning and construction of a PTR with
TAS (RE).
1.3.3 CONSTRUCTION
The details of the range construction, or significant change1 to an existing range is
to be recorded on Police Form 1057 which will replace Army Form (AF) K1309 (see
HPRS Volume 1). Prior to constructing a PTR, consideration should be given to the
need for services, ancillary buildings and other structures. These include:
• Shelter building or structure.
• Target store and workshop.
• Toilets.
1 A significant change is any alteration or addition to a range that changes the purpose of its original intended use or the significant repair, addition or removal of any permanently fixed structure. E.g. a major repair to or replacement of the bullet catcher, the introduction of high elevation fire towers or urban structures onto a range to allow OIBUA training. Temporary shoot through structures may be classed as targetry on LFTTAs.
Page 40 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
• Water supply and drainage.
• Power supply.
• Security and screen fences, barriers, lookout posts, signs, notices, flagpoles
and lights.
• Range roads and parking.
• Ammunition points.
• Communications
1.3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES
a. ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING ISSUES:
When selecting the site for a range, the visual and acoustic effects on the
environment and the general public, as well as any measures to reduce those
effects, are to be assessed. This is particularly important for sites in or near
National Parks, areas used for public leisure and inhabited areas. ED are to be
consulted at an early stage to ascertain whether the area chosen for a PTR is a
conservation designated area or a heritage site, and whether there may be
planning authority sensitivities which require consultation with statutory Bodies.
b. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH ISSUES:
For each new and existing range the following issues are to be considered. Lead
and Carbon Monoxide issues are covered in more detail in Chapter 11.
• Lead: Lead contamination on open ranges where the majority of rounds are
not captured by a stop butt. This will involve the retention of Police Form 906
records to maintain record of the number and type of ammunition fired.
• Carbon monoxide: Indoor ranges, including tube ranges without controlled
ventilation, all indoor test ranges and enclosed firing point ranges should
consider the presence of carbon monoxide.
Page 41 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
• Noise: Covered by the use of hearing protection as set out in Chapter 2,
page 96, paragraph 2.7.9.
1.3.5 BYELAWS
In the UK, ED is to be consulted on the need for byelaws to prohibit unauthorised
persons entering sea, land and air DA, to protect members of the public from the
hazards arising from the Police use of the range and to prevent public interference
with the operation of the range.
1.3.6 SITING BOARD
Detailed requirements and instructions for Siting Boards and Range Acceptance
Boards are contained in Reference A1. (HPRS Volume 1.)
1.4 TEMPORARY EXERCISE RANGES (TER)
1.4.1 INTRODUCTION
The policy for establishing a TER is contained in HPRS Volume 1. Temporary
Exercise Ranges are usually contained partially or wholly within a LFTTA. Live fire
training structures constructed for the exercise are to follow guidance provided in
this HPRS and in the NPFTC.
Page 42 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
1.4.2 AUTHORISATION
a. EXISTING LFTTA:
When a TER is set up within an existing LFTTA so that the whole of the range and
the associated RDA or WDA are contained within its boundary, no additional
authorisation is required for its construction or use for authorised SA, ammunition
and practices.
b. NEW SITES:
When the requirement is for a TER where the RDA or WDA is not wholly within an
existing LFTTA, specific instructions for the construction and use of the range are to
be included in the exercise instructions after a risk assessment. The exercise
reconnaissance should provide sufficient data for detailed design and safety advice
to be provided to the appropriate Range Authorising Officer (RAO). Advice for each
TER can, where appropriate, be provided by TAS (RE). When doubt exists about
topography, structures or the exact location of the range or the associated RDA,
TAS (RE) should, under normal circumstances, carry out an engineering survey and
where necessary Small Arms School Corps (SASC) and Defence Ordnance Group
(DOSG) advice should be sought. Environmental issues will also have to be
addressed (see page 40, paragraph 1.3.4 Environmental Issues). The
appropriate RAO responsible for the exercise is required to authorise firing practices
in accordance with HPRS Volume 1 Chapter 6.
1.5 SEA AND AIR DANGER AREAS
Refer to Chapter 2, pages 47 to 48 and Table 1 on Page 48.
Page 43 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
1.6 WORKS PROJECTS & REFURBISHMENTS
1.6.1 RANGE SAFETY CRITERIA CHECK
a. Compliance to current criteria. Before funds are committed to any new
range, refurbishment or alteration of an existing range, NPIA are to be
notified, following which plans and details should be passed to TAS (RE) to
confirm that the proposal complies with current range safety criteria. Any
new build or major alteration to Range ballistic structures are to be
undertaken by approved Range Contractors. A list of experienced
Contractors is available from TAS (RE).
b. Compliance to Current Facilities Management Legislation. All Ranges
are subject to a biannual works technical inspection as set out in HPRS
Vol. 1 Ch. 8 para. 8.9.2 The CFI is to ensure that the local works
inspections include all regulatory checks and where necessary checks by
qualified, authorised personnel.
1.7 SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
1.7.1 SUSTAINABLE RANGE DEVELOPMENT AND USE
Range development must first provide safe effective operational training facilities
and second, ensure that the effect on range structures and the environment is
minimised. Designers are to specify low maintenance solutions and where possible,
lead bullet debris is to be captured for recycling.
Page 44 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 1 Annex A: Police Procedures for the Procurement of a New Range
Ser Stages Action Appointment / Branch
1 Project Identification and Initiation Need for new range identified a. Training objectives/type of training/ammunition limits b. Predicted usage & user units c. Range type, capacity & targetry d. Land area & DA requirements
Force HQ CFI/NPIA Monitor/ Estates Department (ED)
2 Identify site options a. User force locations b. Available range locations c. Professional & technical appraisal d. Initial survey e. Local Planning Authority (LPA) restrictions f. Timescale requirement g. Targetry
Siting Board (HPRS Vol 1)
CFI/ED/ NPIA Monitor
3 Siting Board a. Confirm site options b. Confirm & set priority
Initiate Form 1057
CFI/Estates NPIA Monitor
4 Assess rough order cost (ROC) including targetry
5 Submit Statement of Requirement (SOR) to funding Command
SOR CFI
6 Identified Project (IP) endorsement & programme entry
Estates
7 Appoint Project Sponsor (PS) Estates 8 Option study HPRS Estates 9 Investment appraisal Estates 10 Initial approval (financial) Budget Holder Project Definition 11 Project brief HPRS Estates/ NPIA
Monitor 12 Appoint Project Manager (PM) HPRS Estates 13 Preliminary & detailed design, &
technical approvals PM/TAS (RE)/ED/
NPIA Monitor 14 Prepare Pre-Tender Estimates (PTE)
& tender documents, update risk assessment
PM
Page 45 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Ser Stages Action Appointment / Branch
15 Final financial approval Budget Holder 16 Works contract award
a. Invite tenders b. Evaluate tenders c. Award contract; update risk
Estates Estates
PS PM/ED PM/NPIA Monitor PS/ED
Construction Contractor PS/PM/ED/NPIA Monitor
17 Consultation, planning, site meetings PS/PM/ED/NPIA Monitor
18 Confirm technical approvals PS/PM/NPIA Monitor
19 Completion PM
20 Range acceptance audit NPIA PS/NPIA Monitor/CFI PM/Estates
21 Issue Forms 1057, 904, 905 and SOPs HPRS Vol 1 NPIA Monitor 22 Rectify snagging PM Post-Construction 23 Financial completion PS/PM 24 Maintenance period completion PS/PM 25 Release retention PS/PM
Page 46 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 2: Range Design Criteria and Specifications
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 AIM
The aim of this chapter is to outline details of the design and specifications
applicable to all police SA Ranges and the marking, fencing, signing and lighting of
all Police Ranges and training areas. Details specific to a particular type of range
are given in Chapters 3-9.
2.1.2 CATEGORISATION OF CRITERIA
Criteria provided in this and other Chapters are categorised where appropriate to
aid users in understanding the implications of that criteria on the safety of a range.
The categories used are summarised below.
• Critical (C): Relates to criteria that may affect the ballistic safety or
effective use of the range.
• Standard (S): Relates to details / criteria which have been derived
empirically and meet current safety requirements. Although not necessarily
critical to the ballistic safety of the range, the detail / criteria provides an
authorised standard solution which will be safe for authorised practices at any
location. Unless stated otherwise all detail in this HPRS may be taken as
standard (S).
Page 47 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
• Typical (T): Relates to details / criteria which is provided for guidance only
indicating a typical solution.
2.1.3 RANGE COMPLIANCE CHECKLIST
All new or refurbished ranges must achieve compliance particularly in those critical
areas that might affect safety. A range compliance checklist is provided at the end
of most range Chapters. The checklist has been produced as a `Guide' to assist
range inspectors, Range Authorising Officers (RAO’s) Project Sponsors (PS), Project
Managers (PM), Designers and Contractors. The aim of the checklist is to provide
guidance and therefore highlight areas that will be subjected to checks to confirm
compliance of a new or refurbished range. Designers submitting plans to TAS (RE)
for compliance checks must include all of the detail listed and any other relevant
information. The checklist is not exhaustive, it is an aid to assist achieving
compliance with HPRS Volume II. Refer also to Volume 1 Chapter 6.
2.2 DEFINITIONS AND RANGE SAFETY TERMS
2.2.1 DEFINITIONS
The definitions and range safety terms that relate directly to the contents of this
Volume have been included in this Chapter.
2.2.2 AIR DANGER AREA
An Air Danger Area (ADA) is the airspace above a range which has been notified as
such, within which activities dangerous to the flight of aircraft may take place or
exist at such times as may be notified. Airspace below 500ft is not controlled by the
Civil Aviation Authority (CAA), however light aircraft, helicopters and military flights
may use this air space.
Page 48 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.2.3 AIR DANGER HEIGHT
The Air Danger Height (ADH) is the maximum height above ground level (AGL) at
which a hazard may exist (see Notes 1 and 2). Table 1 below gives ADH for SA
ammunition.
TABLE 1: ADH FOR SA AMMUNITION
Constructed LDA/FDA
ranges
FDA/LFTTA Ranges Ser Ammunition
No exposed
hard surfaces
Exposed hard
surfaces
QE <150mils
QE 150--
1250 mils (Note 3)
Remarks
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
(ft) (ft) (ft) (ft)
1 5.56 mm 500 1000 1000 8000 Carbine
2 5.56 mm Tracer 500 1000 1000 8000 Carbine
3 7.62 mm 750(see note 4)
1500 1500 8800 Rifle
4 7.62 mm Tracer 750 1500 2000 8800 Rifle
5 12.7 mm Not used Not used 3000 14300 Incl.50”
6 12.7 mm Tracer Not used Not used 4000 14300 Incl.50”
7 30mm Not Used Not Used Ground 4500
Hard Target 9500
8 9 mm 500 500 1000 3200
9 9 mm Tracer L3A1 Spotter
500 500 1000 Not used
10 0.22 in 500 500 1000 1000
11 0.22 in Tracer 500 500 1000 1000
12 8.6mm 500 500 3000 3000 Note 5
13 4.6mm 500 500 1000 1500
Page 49 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Notes
1. The ADH is either the vertex height of the munition nature or its
maximum ricochet height.
2. An ADH is measured in feet (ft) AGL. Altitude is measured in ft Above
Mean Sea Level (AMSL).
3. For HEF (QE 150-1250 mils, Figure 8-1B HEF WDA Template on Page
258) the ADH provided should be applied when the cone of fire is not
captured by the ground.
4. 7.62mm may be fired with an ADH of 500ft providing an air sentry is
provided and the air sentry has clear vision of the air space over the
range. The Duties of Air Sentries are to be detailed in the Range SOPs.
5. LRR 8.6mm ammunition fired under the specific control measures set
out in Reference C.
2.2.4 AMMUNITION DANGER AREA
The area in which personnel are controlled behind active firing points or fully
protected within. See page 61, para 2.2.32 Range Danger Area Template and page
65, para 2.2.45 Weapon Danger Area Template.
2.2.5 ANGLE OF SIGHT
The Angle of Sight (AofS) is the acute angle between the Line of Sight (LofS) and
the horizontal plane.
Page 50 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.2.6 APPROVED RANGE STATUS
A range which varies from the design and build criteria specified for its type, where
the resultant risk is assessed as exceeding the level for a Standard or Non Standard
Range of the same type. However the risk can be managed to a level equal to that
of the equivalent Standard or Non Standard range by the implementation of control
measures.
2.2.7 BACKSPLASH
Backsplash is fragmentation or target debris thrown backwards at any angle
produced by projectile impact.
TABLE 2: BACKSPLASH ZONE (SAFETY DISTANCES)
Serial Weapon Fragment/Earth Throw Distance Hard Tgt (m)
Fragment/Earth Throw Distance Ground Tgt (m)
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1 Air gun Refer to Chapter 3, 3.7.2 Fixing on Page 149.
2 Low velocity pistol and carbine 22 10
3 High velocity rifle and carbine 50 22
4 7.62 mm tracer 125 125
Page 51 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Notes
1. Reserved
2. Backsplash from well-maintained stop butts into the gallery on gallery
ranges should not exceed 5m (see Note 5 below). For NDA ranges
authorised practices may be undertaken down to 10m from targets providing
the bullet catcher is well maintained. A well maintained stop butt and bullet
catcher is one where no bullet debris is permitted to build up around the MPI
and any scooping raked over after each days use.
3. Control measures for backsplash on LFTTAs are covered in Reference B.
4. Backsplash zone for MDP practices using MP7 and 4.6mm steel ammunition
against well maintained bullet traps should not exceed 10m.
5. Backsplash from 7.62mm tracer is 125m from all hard structures and sand
structures with front faces of less than 56deg and heights in excess of 2m.
On compacted earth slopes the 7.62 mm tracer rounds are normally
captured without ricochet
6. On all Ranges when firing authorised practices inside 10m from targets the
following additional precautions are to be implemented:
a. All hard surfaces visible to the fire at the closest distance are to be clad
or protected by appropriate anti-backsplash material. (See page 85,
paragraph 2.7.4c for details.)
b. All personnel are to wear full PPE which is to include hand and eye
protection, with sleeves down and collars and cuffs fastened.
2.2.8 BURST SAFETY DISTANCES
Burst Safety Distances (BSD) are hazard distances away from a fragmenting
weapon.
Page 52 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.2.9 CLEAR RANGE PROCEDURE
A procedure authorised by the CFI and applied by the user force to ensure that the
Range Danger Area is clear of unauthorised persons before firing commences and
that it remains clear throughout the time firing is in progress. The procedure
includes provision for the timely cessation of firing before it poses a risk of hazard
to an intruder in the Range Danger Area. Refer also to HPRS Volume 1 for more
detail.
2.2.10 CLEAR VISION LINE
Clear vision lines are projected from above and below the firer to the target to
ensure there are no distracting protrusions within the firer's peripheral field of
vision in all firing postures (see Chapter 3, page 164, Figure 3-3: Clear Vision Line
(T). The extent of clear vision required is set out in the relevant sections and
chapters of this Volume. Clear vision lines are established to ensure that:
• The risk of backsplash to the firer is eliminated.
• An unrestricted view to the target and its immediate surround is achieved
and maintained.
• The physical build of individual firer's is accounted for.
2.2.11 CONE OF FIRE
The Cone of Fire (C of F) is the distribution of fired projectiles within a margin of
error in the vertical and horizontal planes. For design purposes the cone of fire
figures in Table 3 below are applied around each Line of Sight (+elevation,
Page 53 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
- depression and +/-azimuth). The CofF accounts for acceptable deviation caused
by errors associated with the firer and machining or manufacturing tolerances, and
allows an additional margin for unacceptable firer error. Table 3 lists the authorised
SA CofF applicable on Police ranges.
Page 54 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
TABLE 3: AUTHORISED SA CONES OF FIRE TO BE APPLIED ON POLICE RANGES
Ser Practice Engagement Type
CofF
SS = Single Shot A = Automatic
Azimuth (mils)
Elevation (mils)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
LDA/FDA Ranges (Notes 1 and 2)
1
Rifle / Carbine Static to Static
SS/A
±40
± 40
2 Static to Moving SS A
±60 ± 90
±40 ±40
3 Moving Vehicle smooth track to Static or Moving
SS/A ± 120 ±60
4 Pistol SS/A ± 135 ±135
Field Firing
5 Static to Static SS/A ± 60 ±60
6 Static to Moving SS/A ± 90 ±60
7 Moving Vehicle smooth track to Static or Moving
SS/A ± 120 ±90
8 Moving Vehicle rough terrain to Static or Moving
SS/A ±150 Max Range
9 High Elevation Fire (HEF) SS/A ±150
Max Range
10 Pistol SS ±250 ±190
Restricted Practices (Note 3)
11 Target shooting rifle/carbine supported only Static to Static
SS ± 21.5 ± 21.5
12 Target shooting rifle/carbine supported only Static to Moving
SS ± 40 ± 21.5
13 Rifle practices. (Rifle Officers who are trained to the common national
minimum standards as detailed in
SS ± 12 ± 12
14 Combat Shotgun – Slug Combat Shotgun – Shot
SS SS
+80 +80
+80 +200
Page 55 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Notes
1. LDA/FDA ranges include all open ranges that have DA limited by
construction, or a combination of construction and QE.
2. On LDA ranges automatic fire is restricted to burst fire from bipod/tripod
mounted 5.56 and 7.62 mm weapons. Unsupported Automatic Rifles may
only be burst fired on a FDA range with a 2900m or greater DA.
3. The reduced CofF recommended by DOSG may be applied only under the
following conditions;
a) Use is restricted to competent officers authorised in writing by the
CFI, using a rifle zeroed or check zeroed at not more than 100m each time
the weapon is brought onto the range.
b) The reduced CofF of 21 .5mils is approved only for single shot
supported shooting practices.
4. The maximum range of the weapon system is normally achieved with a
barrel elevation of approximately 620 mils. Above and below this rounds
fall short of maximum range.
2.2.12 DANGER AREA/ZONE
See Range Danger Area / Zone
2.2.13 DANGER AREA TEMPLATE
See Weapon/Range Danger Area Template.
Page 56 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.2.14 DANGER AREA TRACE
See Range Danger Area Trace.
2.2.15 DESIGN APPROVAL
Design approval is the formal act of authorisation in document form, by the
Responsible Authority that the design meets the stated requirements and is suitable
for Police use with or without limitations. For range works and projects this will be
the responsibility of those responsible for Works and Project delivery.
2.2.16 DESIGN AUTHORISATION
Design authorisation is the order or direction to do something to meet stated
requirements by the force responsible for doing so i.e. by the Responsible
Authority. The responsibility may be more limited e.g. Design or Technical
Authorities. Their appointment and limitations are authorised by the Responsible
Authority. For range works and projects this will be the responsibility of the
Property Manager (PM) or Project Sponsor (PS).
2.2.17 DESIGN CERTIFICATION
Design certification is a signed statement by a qualified person that the design
wholly or partially meets or complies with the approved specification(s), which
includes legislation.
2.2.18 GROUND TARGET (ALSO CALLED SOFT)
Ground target refers to all surfaces which, when impacted at low angle (<30°), will
deform or break up. Water surfaces and ice are also classified as a ground target.
Page 57 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
In this document used by contractors and those involved in the design and
construction of ranges the term `Soft' will be used.
2.2.19 HARD TARGET
Hard target refers to all material which possesses sufficient strength and surface
hardness in relation to a given weapon that at low angles of impact the target
suffers little or no deformity. When hard surfaces are exposed to the firer, the
additional DA wings are to be applied (see Chapter 8, pages 257 and 258, Figures
8-1A and 8-1C).
2.2.20 HIGH ELEVATION FIRE
High Elevation Fire (HEF) is fire at a variable vertical firing angle for engaging
targets where the CofF is elevated so that no portion of it is captured by the ground
within a general firing angle of 150-1250 mils.
2.2.21 HILL BACKGROUND
A hill background exists when ground immediately behind the targets rises to form
a hill beyond which no projectile hazard is predicted to exist. If the criteria are met,
consideration can be given to reducing the RDA.
2.2.22 IMPACT AREA/ZONE
An impact area/zone is a space authorised and applied permanently, or at the time
of firing, in which specified weapons may impact, detonate, break up or operate.
The space must be large enough to contain ricochet but have its edge no closer to
the DA/Z boundary than the authorised fragment BSD or other bursting weapon
hazard distance. Access to the impact area/zone must be physically controlled as
Page 58 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
directed by the Range Authorising force. Additional controls may be required due to
the possible presence of blinds.
2.2.23 JUMP
Jump is the vertical component of the acute angle between the muzzle axis before
firing and the line of departure. It can be positive or negative, depending on the
gun.
2.2.24 LINE OF FIRE
The Line of Fire (LofF) is an imaginary straight line from the barrel of the weapon
delivery system to the target. The LofF is used by range designers to ensure safety
from all firing positions. The distinction between Line of Sight (LofS) and LofF is
critical when shooting from the prone position and for sniper fire from inside a
building as although the sight to target is clear, the Line of Fire may not be.
FIG 1: LINE OF SIGHT
2.2.25 LINE OF SIGHT
The LofS is a straight line passing through the aiming device (sight) of the delivery
system and the point of aim on the target so that the firer can see the target he is
engaging. (Fig. 1)
LINE OF FIRE
LINE OF SIGHT
TARGET BOARD
Page 59 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.2.26 MILITARY MEASUREMENT
The angle of military measurement is a mil (1/6400th of a circle) which subtends
approximately 1 mm at 1 m and 1 m at 1 km. This simple unit of measurement
aids setting out and estimating angles and distances in the field. Example: The
height of a range component is required to be 6 mils measured from the firing
point. If the distance from the firing point to the component is 30 m, the height
required is:
• 6 × 30
• 1000 = 0.18 m or 180mm
Note: 1 mil = 0.0562 deg and 1deg = 17.778 mils
2.2.27 PREPARED IMPACT AREA
Where exploding ordnance has a grazing fuse that may not ignite in soft ground,
the area around the target is prepared with stone or gravel. The extent of the hard
surface will depend on the predicted weapon and aimer error.
2.2.28 QUADRANT ELEVATION
The Quadrant Elevation (QE) is the angle between the horizontal plane and the axis
of the bore when laid (sighted). (See page 123, Figure 2-1: Ballistic Angles). For
the purposes of range design in this publication the following sub definitions are
provided:
• QE TCH = QE to the Target Centre Height (Physical point on a range
that can be measured).
Page 60 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
• QE Actual = QE TCH + CofF.
• QE Max = QE Restriction applied.
2.2.29 RANGE (ZONE)
A range is a space reserved, authorised and normally equipped for hazardous firing
(weapons or lasers). The following are types of range:
a. Indoor Range. An indoor range is fully contained within a building or
other structure.
b. Open (Outdoor) Range. An open range is exposed to the natural effects
of light, wind and other meteorological conditions. The range may be
completely open or contained partially by a structure.
c. No Danger Area Range. A No Danger Area (NDA) range is a range
where, for all practical purposes, the design precludes risk of injury or
damage to persons or property beyond the range floor caused by shot,
direct or ricochet, fired in accordance with authorised procedures and
aimed within the bounds of acceptable aimer error.
d. Limited Danger Area Range. A Limited Danger Area (LDA) range is an
open range for which the minimum design requirements are to capture
shot so that any resultant ricochet remains within the RDA.
e. Full Danger Area Range. A Full Danger Area (FDA) range is an open
range where hazard including any Burst Safety Distance (BSD) is only
limited by the elevation of the delivery system and the skill of the firer.
Page 61 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
f. Total Energy Range. A total energy range is a range where a weapon
may be fired without restriction.
2.2.30 RANGE AUTHORISING OFFICER
The Range Authorising Officer (RAO) is the officer responsible for personally
certifying on the Police Form 904 the weapon systems, munitions and explosive
stores which can be used on the range (see HPRS Volume 1).
2.2.31 RANGE DANGER AREA/ZONE
The RDA/Z is the space within a range in which there may be a risk to personnel,
equipment or property from firing authorised weapons within specific arcs. The
RDA/Z should be within the range area boundary. Access to and movement within
the RDA/Z are controlled through Range SOPs.
Note: Boundaries on land are to have appropriate control measures in place to
warn the public and to deter access eg signs, fences, flags, lights and sentries. See
also HPRS Volume 1. At sea, buoys may have to be provided.
2.2.32 RANGE DANGER AREA TEMPLATE
A RDA template is a technical drawing which defines the boundary of prescribed
risk from firing authorised weapons within specific arcs on a range built to approved
criteria. The RDA template is to be worked to a given scale and produced on
appropriate material for convenient application to a map.
Page 62 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Notes:
• Elements of construction including firing point alignments with targets will
affect hazard contours and hence change the shape of specific RDA.
• The RDA template will only apply to a range built to the specifications and
criteria set out in this document.
• The RDA template is range type, weapon(s) type, munition(s) type and
QE specific.
• In areas where there is limited land available, particularly if there are hills
in the direction of fire, it is possible using alternative information such as
the Weapon Danger Area Lab system allied to additional controls to allow
the use of a reduced danger area.
2.2.33 RANGE DANGER AREA TRACE
A RDA trace is a technical drawing of a common composite DA which is deduced
from an amalgamation of a number of WDA templates. The trace is worked to a
given scale and produced on appropriate material for convenient application to a
map.
2.2.34 RANGE FLOOR
The range floor comprises the ground from the furthest firing point to the target
including any range construction intended for, or capable of, capturing correctly
aimed shots or reducing ricochet.
Page 63 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.2.35 RANGE SAFETY DISPENSATION
A range safety dispensation is considered for a particular range that cannot be
designated as an Approved Range due to range structure, layout or danger area. It
is a written authorisation by the RAO, to permit continued use of a range when it
does not meet currently prescribed safety criteria.
A Dispensated Range is one which varies from the design and build criteria specified
for its type and results in a level of risk which exceeds that currently accepted for a
Standard Range of the same type, and where the risk can not be managed by the
implementation of control measures. A dispensation should only be authorised
when no achievable alternative solution exists. Live fire use should be restricted to
essential training only. The dispensation is to be reviewed annually and removed
as soon as the reason for its implementation is resolved.
2.2.36 RICOCHET
A ricochet is the change of direction and velocity, induced in a projectile, missile or
fragment caused by its impact with a surface. For design purposes ricochet is
generally taken as 30° off soft targets and 45° off hard surfaces in elevation and
azimuth for high velocity ammunition. For low velocity ammunition the ricochet
angles are taken as 15° off ground and 45° off hard. For specific range advice TAS
may utilise data provided by DOSG from trials (See also page 83, para 2.7.2 d).
Ricochet greater than 90° is regarded as backsplash (See page 50, para 2.2.7,
Table 2.)
2.2.37 SMALL ARMS
Small Arms (SA) is a general term for small calibre (normally up to 12.7 mm)
weapon systems.
Page 64 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.2.38 TANGENT ELEVATION
Tangent elevation (TE) is the angle between the LofS to the target and the axis of
the bore.
2.2.39 TEMPLATE
A template is a technical drawing worked to a given scale and produced on
appropriate material for convenient application.
2.2.40 TRACE
A Trace is a technical drawing of an amalgamation of WDA templates worked to a
given scale and produced on appropriate material for convenient application to a
map.
2.2.41 TYPE STANDARD
Type Standards are produced to provide contractors and consultants with a more
detailed explanation of each of the range types to assist in the development of their
design solutions. The document contains the technical specialist ballistic elements
of a design brief for a range and detailing the ballistic and functional requirements
to be incorporated in the design.
2.2.42 VECTOR ANGLE
A vector angle is an angle with a horizontal and vertical component. Vector angle is
not used in assessing range compliance as the ricochet angle used represents total
turn and not the elevation and azimuth components of ricochet.
Page 65 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.2.43 WEAPON
A weapon is an object designed, used or capable of being used as an instrument for
inflicting harm to health, property or the environment.
2.2.44 WEAPON DANGER AREA/ZONE
A WDA/Z is the space into which specified weapons or their fragments may travel,
impact or function given normal firing conditions. The WDA/Z excludes low
probability human and system errors.
2.2.45 WEAPON DANGER AREA TEMPLATE
A WDA template is a technical drawing of an approved DA for a single delivery
means and a single target, projected on a specified LofF bearing, worked to a given
scale on appropriate material for convenient application to a map.
Notes:
• On a FDA the WDA template can be used to deduce a variable safe area
by swinging the template within allocated arcs. The deduced safe area
becomes a trace for the single weapon system. (See NPFTC).
• Combining more than one WDA template produces a trace.
• RDAs and WDAs, and therefore the templates, require review. Unless a
revised template has been approved in accordance with Police
instructions, it must never be used for firing.
2.2.46 WUF
Weapon Unloading Facility either static or transportable. All transportable units are
proprietary designs.
Page 66 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.3 RANGE SAFETY STANDARDS
2.3.1 GENERAL
The risk of a projectile leaving a range is minimised by a combination of design,
training and control.
2.3.2 DESIGN PARAMETERS
Range design is based on historical evidence, advice in DOSG Procs and MLs, this
HPRS and advice from TAS (RE). DOSG have provided advice on scientific data
generated from trials and considered opinion, based on appropriate ballistic and
statistical calculations, on reasonable levels of range safety. NDA and other open
ranges are not designed on the absolute worst case. They are designed to capture
all properly aimed projectiles with an additional degree of safety for acceptable
aimer error and ricochet. Ranges are not designed to capture all projectiles from
accidental or negligent discharge. Ranges that were designed to type drawings
have given no cause for concern and still meet the current minimum level of safety.
New ranges and major refurbishment of ranges are to be constructed to the design
criteria in this Volume; advice from TAS (RE) is to be sought. Legislative
requirements of the Health and Safety at Work etc Act and the Management of
Health and Safety at Work Regulations are satisfied by the design process
undertaken by consultants and contractors commissioned by the Police under the
conditions given in current regulations. The mandatory detail provided in this
Volume addresses identified and predictable hazards, to which it provides
engineering solutions to reduce the perceived risk to As Low As Reasonably
Practicable (ALARP). The controls necessary to achieve these reduced risks are
stipulated in NPFTC, which in conjunction with this Volume, form the major
components of the Safe System whereby a safe environment for effective
operational training with small arms weapon systems is achieved.
Page 67 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.3.3 ACCURACY OF CONSTRUCTION
This publication provides the minimum standards that should be achieved. Where
an element is fundamental to the level of safety provided it is indicated as Critical
(C). These elements will be subjected to compliance checks on completion of works.
On existing ranges, elements that do not conform to the standard must be included
in the range Risk Assessment to determine if the level of safety provided is
affected. Where the level of safety is reduced, control measures must be applied to
maintain the level of safety required. Where this cannot be achieved the range may
only operate under dispensation until such time as a full assessment is completed
and Approved range status is authorised. Elements that are not classified as (C) will
be subject to acceptable construction tolerances.
2.3.4 COMPLIANT RANGES
A compliant range is one which meets the design and build criteria specified for its
type in HPRS Volume 2. Most ranges have some degree of non conformity.
Although different from those illustrated in this HPRS they will conform to the
safety critical elements described in the respective chapters. Where doubt exists
TAS (RE) is to be consulted and if necessary DOSG advice will be sought prior to
seeking Approved Range Status. (See Page 50, para 2.2.6 Approved Range Status).
2.3.5 MAINTENANCE
To ensure that ranges in use conform to current safety criteria, effective
maintenance is essential. Range Wardens' duties are given in HPRS Volume 1.
When a range does not warrant a full time Warden, the CFI is to appoint a
competent person to carry out these duties. The frequency of maintenance and
Page 68 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
inspections is given in HPRS Volume 1. A range works inspection guide is available
to all range works officers from NPIA that describes the range elements that are to
be inspected at least every 2 years as set out in HPRS Volume 1.
2.3.6 CONDUCT AND TRAINING
A range is designed and built only for qualified and authorised personnel with
weapon systems authorised for use on the range, under proper supervision and in
accordance with Police instructions.
2.3.7 POPULATION DENSITY
Planning Staff and siting boards must consider population density and public
sensitivity around a proposed range before determining location and orientation.
2.3.8 SITING PREFERENCES
Outdoor ranges should be sited facing north (in the Northern Hemisphere) so that
firers do not engage targets into direct sunlight. The range should also be sited as
far as possible from habitation as it is difficult to reduce impulse noise generated
without modification to the weapon. When siting ranges, aligning the direction of
fire away from habitation when possible should take precedence. The total energy
template should be considered when assessing population and habitation in the
area of the proposed new range.
2.3.9 IDENTIFICATION OF CRITICAL, STANDARD AND TYPICAL REQUIREMENTS.
All details in the respective range chapters represent the authorised STANDARD (S)
to be adopted. Those elements that may be provided in many forms will be
designated as TYPICAL (T). As the margins of safety incorporated in the STANDARD
Page 69 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
are wide, a range element that fails to meet this STANDARD is unlikely alone to
make the range unsafe. Elements that do not comply to the STANDARD are non
compliant and should be assessed to determine the level of safety achieved. Critical
(C) dimensions are provided where minimum ballistic data exists.
2.4 LIMITATIONS OF BALLISTIC PERFORMANCE ON RANGES
2.4.1 GENERAL
This section applies to SA; the limitations for other WS are given in the appropriate
Chapters.
2.4.2 WEAPON PERFORMANCE
The performance of weapons can be expressed in several ways. For Police
purposes, muzzle velocity (MV) and muzzle energy (ME) are used. These
performance criteria are directly related to current Police ammunition types in
determining WDA, penetration data, backsplash and ricochet. However, it is
essential to specify the weapon performance limits for each range type to ensure
that the range remains safe during use. Weapon performance may vary depending
on several factors, one of which is:
• Type of Ammunition: Certain types of ammunition can significantly
enhance the effects of a weapon system that could result in its
performance exceeding the design criteria of the range.
Page 70 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.4.3 AUTHORISED SA WEAPONS
As the requirement is to limit firing to those SA that perform safely within the
design criteria of the range, only those weapons whose MV and ME do not exceed
the criteria stated on the Police Form 904 may be fired on constructed ranges.
When only one performance criterion of a SA conforms to the authorised limits, TAS
(RE) should be consulted on matters of construction and the HQ of the RAO for
clearance to fire; both may wish to seek DOSG advice. For example, a light, small
calibre bullet with an MV higher than the specification for the range may have an
ME within the specification but such a bullet is likely to have very different ricochet
characteristics to the slower, heavier bullet for which the range has been designed.
AP ammunition is not to be fired on constructed ranges. For RDA details of
authorised weapons refer to page 256, Figure 8-1: RDA Template Gallery Range,
page 257, Figure 8-1A: RDA Template, <QE 150 mils - ETR and page 258, Figure
8-1B: HEF WDA Template SA Ammunition QE > 150 < 1250 mils.
2.4.4 MUZZLE VELOCITY AND MUZZLE ENERGY LIMITATIONS
Each range will be authorised for specified SA and ammunition. The limitations for
SA, contained in Table 4 and any other limitations on how a range can be used will
be stated on the Police Form 904 and in Range SOPs. The commonly used term Low
Velocity (LV) is related to serials 1 to 3 in Table 4 below. “High Velocity” (HV) refers
to weapons with MV greater than 655m/s.
Page 71 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
TABLE 4: SA AMMUNITION MAXIMUM MV AND ME LIMITATIONS (C)
Ser Weapon Type Indoor Open
MV(m/s) ME (J) MV(m/s) ME (J)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 Air rifle N/A 16 (12ft lbs) N/A 16 (12ft lbs)
2 Low velocity weapon only
530 (1735ft/sec)
285 (210ft lbs)
610 (2000ft/sec)
480 (350ft lbs)
3 LV pistol/carbine 520 (1705ft/sec)
645 (475ft/lbs)
655 (2145ft/sec)
2030 (1495ft lbs)
4 HV rifle/carbine NDA ranges
1000 (3280ft/sec)
7000 (5160ft/lbs)
1000 (3280ft/sec)
7000 (5160ft lbs)
5 HV rifle/carbine on ranges with GR LDA 1000 (3280ft/sec)
45001 (331 9ft lbs)
6 HV rifle/carbine on other ranges No ME/MV limits – Refer to Para 2.6 Range Types (Page 78) to determine extent of RDA required.
NOTES:
• Weapons with ME greater than 4500J but less than 7000J may be used
on gallery type ranges providing authorised control measures are in
place.
• These figures relate to defence structure specifications in Table 7a.
• Civilian use of tracer is not permitted on constructed ranges. Where
tracer is authorised on LFTTA ranges civilian clubs may fire tracer
ammunition providing provision is made to ensure any local restrictions
are made known to the club.
• Civil clubs may only use copper or steel jacketed lead core or solid lead
rounds on Police ranges.
Page 72 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.4.5 BLACK POWDER WEAPONS
Black powder or black powder substitute propelled weapons may be fired on open
ranges. MV and ME must not however exceed the specified limits for that range.
Black powder weapons are not to be fired in indoor ranges.
2.4.6 JACKETED AND NON-STANDARD BULLETS
Table 7a: Steel Protective Plating for Ranges (on Page 92) gives the required
thickness of steel protective plating for indoor ranges to be safe against jacketed
and unjacketed bullets. Tracer and other specified specialist ammunition natures
may be fired on various ranges, the conditions for which are to be found in the
chapters of this Volume that deal with particular range designs.
2.4.7 CONVERSION OF BALLISTIC DATA
It may be necessary to convert ballistic data to make a comparison with data
available in this Volume and elsewhere. This paragraph provides simple equations
to calculate ME, when MV and weight are known, and to convert weight expressed
in grains (gr) to an expression in grams (g).
Calculation of Energy: When MV and bullet weight are known, ME in joules (J) may be calculated: 1/2NV2 = MEJ N = Bullet weight in kg V = MV in m/s e.g. Eley Tenex 0.22 in Bullet weight (N) = 2.59g or 0.00259kg MV(V) = 331 m/s.
Page 73 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Answer: ME = 0.5 x 0.00259 x 3312 = 142J. Conversion of Bullet Weight: Bullet weight expressed in g (avoirdupois) may be converted to g SI (Système International d'Unités): 1gr = 0.065g 1g = 15.432gr. Energy: ME expressed in foot pounds (ft lbs) force (imperial) may be converted to J (SI). 1J = 0.738ft lbs 1ft lbs = 1.3556J Velocity: MV expressed in feet per second (ft/s imperial) may be converted to metres per second (m/s) (SI): 1ft/s = 0.3048m/s 1m/s = 3.281ft/s
2.4.8 AUTOMATIC FIRE
The constraints for automatic fire on specific ranges are set out in the relevant
chapters.
2.5 RANGE DIMENSIONS AND DRAWINGS
2.5.1 IMPERIAL AND METRIC
All range design is in metric units. This Volume has converted imperial dimensions
to metric, rounded as appropriate where safety parameters allow. Inspectors should
measure imperial ranges against the original imperial dimensions. Where ranges
are converted from imperial to metric, then checks should be carried out using
metric units. On those ranges that are a mix of imperial and metric, care must be
taken to ensure critical safety parameters are maintained. The principal areas of
concern for each range type are covered in the respective chapters of this Volume.
Page 74 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.5.2 GENERAL
The police, through the PRWP, approve design criteria and, where applicable,
drawings for the range types outlined in this Volume so that normal training
objectives may be achieved. There are several categories of range drawings and
their purpose is given in this section.
2.5.3 TYPE DRAWINGS/TYPE STANDARDS
Type Drawings were originally created to give the requirements necessary to
construct new range facilities. However they contain much constructional detail that
is prescriptive and out of date. Type Drawings are no longer issued to contractors
or consultants. Type Drawings are replaced with Type Standards that place the
design responsibility onto consultants commissioned by the police to develop a
range. Current Type Standards are listed in Table 5.
TABLE 5: TYPE STANDARDS HELD BY TAS (RE)
Ser Number Description
(a) (b) (c)
1 TS-01 RGGS – (Obsolete) 2 TS-02 Indoor Ranges
3 TS-03 Non Standard Outdoor NDA Ranges
4 TS-04 Converted Gallery Ranges
5 TS-05 Tube Ranges
6 TS-06 25m Barrack Ranges
7 TS-07 Electric Target Ranges
8 TS-08 CQB Urban Live Fire Ranges
9 RDG-01 Test Ranges
10 RDG-02 Control of noise on constructed RangesNoise from Ranges
Page 75 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.5.4 CONSTRUCTION/RECORD DRAWING
Construction drawings are based on the Type Standard and are produced by a
consultant or contractor. These will be specific to the site with the details of the
shape of the range floor, foundations and all that cannot be specified in the Type
Standard. If during the construction of the range there are no fundamental changes
to the contract, the construction drawing serves as the record drawing.
2.5.5 AS-BUILT DRAWING
If during the contract, details are changed from the original design, as-built
drawings are required to record the actual details of the range. Normally their
provision is part of the standard contract and is a requirement of the Construction
(Design and Management) Regulations. For existing ranges without record or as-
built drawings, they should be provided retrospectively.
2.5.6 DRAWINGS PRODUCED BY TAS (RE)
The production of the Technical Office and Sketch series of drawings ceased at the
end of December 1996. All important drawings were archived and retained for
record purposes and copies will only be released after careful consideration of the
content and potential implications of issue (using a covering letter where necessary
to highlight the drawing status/purpose and how the details may be used). From
January 1997 the release of drawn information has been restricted to the following:
Page 76 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
• Type Standards: The production of Type Standards replaces the
existing outdated and prescriptive Type Drawings and is approved for
issue by the PRWP. Once complete these essentially form the technical
elements of a design brief, detailing only the ballistic and functional
requirements
• Certification Drawings: This series of drawings referred to as
Licensing Drawings (LD) are approved for issue by OC TAS and have
been introduced to support the Certifying Officers by giving extremely
accurate range location and template details to assist in the certification
of facilities. For each range the danger area is projected from actual
lines of sight on that range, which are not always parallel, producing a
range specific danger area template. All open ranges should seek to
have a range specific template that reflects their range danger area
precisely and will also assist the siting of adjacent ranges or facilities.
• Illustrative Sketches: This series of drawings serves three basic
purposes, the aim being to provide assistance to all concerned with
range compliance, design and development:
- To illustrate TAS Total Station surveys with the criteria overlaid to
determine compliance or otherwise with Standard Criteria. Usually
read in conjunction with Survey Record (SR) Drawings.
- To illustrate proposed templating and / or range positioning as part
of or following a desktop study.
- To illustrate where necessary, principles or typical solutions in
support of written reports.
Page 77 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
• Survey Records: Survey records are a series of drawings illustrating
the results of Total Station and GPS Surveys supporting technical
drawings of a range and the danger areas.
2.5.7 RANGE MAPS:
There are a number of maps available to Forces each provided to meet specific
needs.
Range Master Map: Provided by ED as required by HPRS Volume 1. This
includes definitive information on police boundary, lease land, over firing
rights, sea danger areas from the Hydrographic Office and the extent of range
danger areas.
2.5.8 CHANGE RECORDS
Original range ballistic construction details are recorded on the Police Form 1057.
Any subsequent significant repairs or changes to the range must be recorded onto
the 1057, or where there is substantial change a new 1057 form is to be issued.
This will ensure a clear audit trail is maintained and that all changes are properly
checked for compliance.Significant changes include major refurbishment to or
replacement of bullet catchers, adding or changing firing points or target types and
positions.
Page 78 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.6 RANGE TYPES
2.6.1 SMALL ARMS WEAPON SYSTEM RANGES:
This Volume deals with all Small Arms Weapon System Ranges designed for a
specific purpose. The range types included in this Volume include:
a. NO DANGER AREA (NDA) RANGES: To be classed as an NDA range, all
anticipated shot must be contained within the range with a substantial margin of
safety. See definition at page 60, para 2.2.29 Range (Zone). The following
range types may be classed as NDA ranges:
• Indoor Ranges including tube ranges. • 25m Barrack ranges. • The 1908 design 30m range (now only used from the 25m firing point). • Some test ranges. • Non standard open NDA ranges.
b. LIMITED DANGER AREA (LDA) RANGES: Ranges where some rounds
are expected to leave the area of the range floor either from direct fire or ricochet
have a limited danger area to ensure all rounds are contained in a controlled area.
A full definition is provided at page 60, para 2.2.29 Range (Zone). Such ranges
include:
• The Gallery Range (GR): (See Chapter 8 for details). The Gallery
range has a limited danger area based on the principle that the CofF is
lifted from the range floor by the mantlet thereby reducing the
incidence of ground ricochet, the primary source of rounds escaping a
range. A 1830m RDA is usually applied. Most existing ranges have a QE
restriction (QEmax) of 70mils, which equates to QEtch of 30mils to
ensure the limited danger area is sufficient. Gallery ranges with
Page 79 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
modified mantlet and stop butts that have been increased in height to
capture the whole CofF do not need to impose the QE restriction as all
predicted direct fire from the 100m firing point will be captured. A
further reduction in the length of the RDA from 1830m may be
considered if and when hill background criteria are met.
• The Converted Gallery Range (CGR): (See Chapter 9 for details).
This range is a Gallery range with the gallery frames and Fixed Electric
Targets (FETs) mounted into the top of the mantlet. A 1830m RDA is
usually applied from the target line.
• The Electric Target (Limited Danger Area) Range (ET(LDA)R):
(See Chapter 9 for details). This range has no gallery, has Fixed
Electric Targets (FETs) mounted into the top of the mantlet often with
Automatic Marking Systems (AMS) fitted. An 1830m RDA is usually
applied.
• High velocity non-standard No Danger Area range: These
ranges without a canopy are classed as LDA ranges as they have a
100m RDA beyond the target line. Chapter 4 provides the details.
• Hill Background Ranges: No ranges to date have met the criteria at
page 126, Figure 2-4: Hill Background Criteria. Open ranges with
a hill rising behind the stop butt may be assessed by WDA Lab to
determine the actual RDA required on such ranges.
c. FULL DANGER AREA (FDA) RANGES
• The Electric Target Range (ETR) - 600m: A flat range floor with
FETs located at 100, 200 & 300m from the main firing point. All shot is
automatically recorded and targets are able to fall when hit. A WDA is usually
applied with hard target wings when necessary.
Page 80 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
• The Individual Battle Shooting Range (IBSR): This range provides
excellent transition to tactical training providing firing from cover, fire and
movement tactical firing and moving targets. A WDA is usually applied with
hard target wings when necessary.
d. PISTOL RANGES: Pistols are often fired on NDA and other ranges. When fired
on LDA / FDA ranges the pistol template is applied using the CofF for pistol under
LDA/FDA ranges in Table 3. A 1500m RDA is usually applied.
2.7 RANGE DESIGN
2.7.1 DESIGN PRINCIPLES:
Safety on and around ranges is provided by the provision of safe weapon systems,
training, control measures, supervision and for constructed ranges, safe design. To
ensure ranges remain safe the design must also take into account cost in use by
minimising the maintenance effort. There are four categories into which all ranges
fall to provide a safe shooting environment.
a. TOTAL ENERGY (TE) RANGE: A total energy range will have a template
large enough to capture all shot fired in a particular direction without further
restriction. Large land or sea danger areas are required to capture the
maximum projectile trajectory.
b. FULL DANGER AREA (FDA) RANGE: A Full Danger Area (FDA) range is
an open range where the hazard is limited by the elevation of the delivery
system and the skill of the firer. The amount of land or sea danger area
required is minimised by controlling the elevation of the weapon.
Page 81 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
c. LIMITED DANGER AREA (LDA) RANGE: A Limited Danger Area (LDA) range
is an open range for which the minimum design requirements are to capture
direct shot and any resultant ricochet remains within the RDA. A combination
of limiting elevation and the inclusion of range structures to capture shot and
or minimise ricochet enables the danger area to be further reduced.
d. NO DANGER AREA (NDA) RANGE: A No Danger Area (NDA) range is a range
where, for all practical purposes, the design precludes risk of injury or
damage to persons or property outside the range.
2.7.2 SAFE DESIGN
The standard details provided in the respective range chapters have proven to be
safe over a long period of extended use. The margins of safety in the standard
designs extend far beyond the predicted Cone of Fire (CofF). No current modern
design solution will be allowed to fall below these existing levels. For non standard
open NDA ranges for instance, following application of CofF criteria in Figure 2–4:
Hill Background Criteria on Page 126, the established criteria shown in Figure 2-2
on Page 124, and Figure 2-3: Calculating Stop Butt Widths NDA Range (Existing
Ranges Only) on Page 125 are applied and it is the safer of the two solutions that
are used. Minor changes have been made to particular elements to ease
maintenance and therefore become more cost effective in use. Factors considered
to ensure a safe range include:
A. DIRECT FIRE: Predicted direct fire is either stopped by defence
structures, limited by Quadrant Elevation (see Figure 2-1: Ballistic Angles on Page
123) or a full energy template is provided. For design purposes, direct fire is that
shot which falls within the Cones of Fire (CofF) set out in Table 3 on Page 54.
Experience, trial evidence and advice indicate that these CofF are more than
adequate for authorised practices.
Page 82 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
B. RICOCHET: Ricochet from range structures and surfaces are generally the
limiting factor for the range designer. The exception is where ricochet occurs off
hard smooth surfaces. In this circumstance the exit angle is normally half the
impact angle. Ricochet must be expected off all surfaces that a round may strike at
angles of less than 30° including standing water. Ricochet is minimised off slopes of
30° or more and eliminated off slopes of 56° or more. Tracer ammunition has
different ricochet characteristics the extent of which is provided in Fig. 8-1 (Page
256). Ricochet will influence the size of defence structures and danger areas
including the air danger height. The use of ricochet pits can reduce the height of
catcher structures when using logical design principles. On all ranges, rounds that
strike the range may:
• Be captured by the ground or structure.
• Break up on impact and fragment over a small area.
• Remain intact, change direction, exit at shallow angle and tumble with sufficient residual energy to achieve medium range potential.
• Remain intact, change direction, exit at shallow angle, re stabilise, with sufficient residual energy to achieve longer range potential.
• Deflect off target frames or other range components with little loss of energy.
C. BACKSPLASH: Provision has to be made to prevent backsplash from any
structure, fixtures or fittings that may otherwise reach back to the firing point.
Table 2 gives backsplash distances and the relevant chapters give further details.
There is an additional hazard from poorly designed or fitted protective measures. If
a round is able to pass through a timber baffle, protective material, target backing,
target holder or post, it may decelerate sufficiently so that it does not penetrate
through the anti-splash curtain but bounces back from the curtain and could reach
the firing point with a hazardous velocity. This problem may occur on indoor, tube,
test or other ranges where anti splash curtains are used.
Page 83 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
D. HIDDEN ATTRITION: High velocity rounds penetrate soft material such as
timber loosing very little energy and leaving only a slight indentation at the point of
entry. When a round strikes the dense material behind all energy is dissipated often
causing extensive damage (attrition) behind the softer protective material. Defence
structures should be capable of taking all predicted shot over a long period without
undue attrition and should be designed to eliminate the possibility of hidden
attrition. Where this is not possible procedures will need to be put in place to
ensure the ballistic element is not penetrated. This will entail ease of access to
facilitate inspection of the hidden element.
E. FIXINGS: When fixing a material to the structure in the ballistic zones, care
is required to ensure unwanted ricochet or backsplash is not caused. Oval, not
round head nails, are to be used to fix timber on to hard surfaces and the nail
heads punched in. Bolts and screws are to be countersunk and plugged. Any other
metal fixings should also be countersunk or protected.
F. TRACER AMMUNITION: With the exception of 5.56mm tracer ammunition is
much less predictable and additional danger area boxes must be provided on all
ranges where tracer may strike extensive sand range structures that project above
ground level. The extent of tracer ammunition danger area around structures is
illustrated on Fig. 8-1 (Page 256). (Earth banks hold and contain tracer rounds
more so than sand.)
2.7.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
Common to all range design are the following criteria;
a. LINE OF FIRE (LofF): An imaginary line taken from the barrel of a weapon to
the point of aim on a target. Range structures in front of the barrel and down range
Page 84 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
such as baffles are designed by applying the respective CofF to the LofF or Lines of
Fire where more than one points of aim or firing points exist. On 25m NDA ranges
assessment for compliance is taken only from the 25m firing points to the centre of
authorised targets.
b. LINE OF SIGHT (LOFS). The LofS is the line from the weapon sight to the point
of aim on a target. Clear vision parameters are applied to the LofS. Structures close
to the firer may not block the LofS but are directly in the LofF. Structures at the
target end of the range are designed by applying the CofF to the LofS.
c. FIRING POSTURES. Current Police shooting is carried out from both
unsupported and supported firing position (see Reference C1). In the design of
ranges, no account is taken of the respective stability of the three postures listed
below. However it is acknowledged that supported firing positions provide a more
stable weapon platform and this is often used as a restriction on non standard
ranges. Supported practices allow smaller CofF to be used (see Table 3, Page 54).
d. POSTURE HEIGHTS. The following posture heights are used as standard design
criteria. There will inevitably be some variation due to individual physical
characteristics, however as these are not predictable, a standard has been adopted
for design purposes.
• Standing unsupported - 1500mm (C).
• Kneeling / sitting / squatting - 800mm (C).
• Prone / standing in a fire trench - 300mm (C).
e. CLEAR VISION LINE (CVL): Although primarily used in the development of
indoor shooting facilities it is also a good principle to apply to outdoor ranges. A
CVL is projected from each firing posture to avoid distractions directly in front of
Page 85 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
the firer and to help minimise the risk of backsplash from protruding structures
down range. The CVL should extend:
1. VERTICALLY. The upper line is projected from 600 mm above
the highest firing posture used on the range to 250 mm above the
highest target centre. The lower line is projected 300 mm below
the lowest posture height used on the range to 250 mm below the
lowest target centre (see Figure 3-3: Clear Vision Line (T) on
Page 164).
2. HORIZONTALLY. 500 mm clear range space should be allowed
parallel to the flank LofF at all firing points down the complete length
oftherange.
NOTE: The CVL does not apply when the barrel is clamped or
specifically positioned within an aperture e.g. in a test or tube range.
f. TRAJECTORY: The trajectory of a bullet on the LofF is used to determine
the position of down range structures to minimise attrition.
2.7.4 RANGE COMPONENTS:
Specific component details provided in this HPRS are derived to provide confidence
that the required level of safety is provided irrespective of location and detail of any
particular range. See details in respective range chapters. Common to all ranges
are:
Page 86 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
a. FIRING POINT: Firing points could be at almost any distance and height
although each needs careful consideration to determine the appropriate lines of fire
for subsequent application of criteria to establish requirements for protective
structures. Each firing point should be accurately positioned and marked on the
ground to assist in maintaining correct lines of fire in accordance with the original
design. Distance markers should be provided on both flanks. Where elevated fire
towers are provided it is essential to ensure that the elevated LofF will not expose
mechanised target systems to direct strike.
b. FIRING POINT SPACING/ LANE WIDTHS: To establish sufficient space
for the firer taking account of supervision, distraction, ejected cases, smoke and
noise the following guidelines are provided. Standard details are provided in
respective range chapters.
• LV pistol / carbine semi automatic - 1000mm with benches & screens,
1800mm without benches and screens.
• HV rifle/carbine semi automatic – 1800mm. Automatic - 2500mm.
c. BACKSPLASH AND RICOCHET PROTECTION: On all ranges exposed hard
surfaces, services and the like must be protected from direct fire and ricochet.
Traditionally timber is added to the face of hard surfaces and steel baffles to
prevent backsplash and excessive ricochet but other materials may be just as
suitable. The material used must prevent the bullet backsplashing or ricocheting
back out from the protection. To reduce attrition, the protection material is off set
from the hard surface to allow the bullet to break up on the hard surface without
causing excessive damage to the protection material. Where softwood timber is
used the following will be deemed compliant:
• Low velocity. 25 mm boarding on 25 mm battens. (C) (Backsplash zone 50mm boarding on 25 mm battens. (C)).
Page 87 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
• High velocity. 50 mm boarding on 50 mm battens (C) (Backsplash zone 75mm boarding on 50 mm battens. (C)). Note: The use of oval nails in fixing such boarding will minimise potential backsplash hazards.
d. TARGET POSITIONING: The design target centre height and flank target
positions should be permanently marked. Such marking ensures the correct
relationship with defence structures is maintained. As the structure size is directly
related to the target position, the targets should be positioned as close as is
practicable to the base of the bullet catcher/stop butt to minimise construction
requirements. Positioning of targets in accordance with the following guidelines
should assist in providing sensible parameters for target positioning and enable
realistic lines of fire whilst not compromising the safety of the range.
• Target Heights: The target centre (highest aiming point) should generally
correspond to the height of the weapon to achieve a near level line of fire,
although there are circumstances which may demand either elevated or
depressed lines of fire. Typical target centre heights of between 450mm (T)
lowest and 1500mm (T) highest are recommended. Standard details are
provided in subsequent chapters.
• Target Spacing: The target centre spacing should generally correspond to
the spacing of the firers although converging lines of fire are acceptable.
Typical spacing may be as close as 600mm (T) from centre to centre with the
usual maximum spacing being parallel to the firer spacing (diverging lines of
fire are not normally used as this would increase the size and cost of
protective structures and danger areas).
• Multi Point Targets & Target Screens: Target screens are often used on
outdoor NDA ranges. Where such targets are used the minimum defence
structure dimensions provided in Table 6 (Page 91) are applied as illustrated
Page 88 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
in Figure 4 (overleaf). Once established the max target centre height and
flank target positions should be clearly marked.
• Target Positional Markings:
- Maximum and Minimum Target Centre Height. The highest and
lowest permitted target centre height should be indicated at the
target line on both flanks (a recommended method of marking can
be seen in Fig 2). These markings should be in a highly contrasting
colour paint and permanent.
FIGURE 2: RECOMMENDED TARGET CENTRE HEIGHT MARKINGS
- Target
Flank
Markings.
These should be clearly indicated at the target line, for both left and
right flank most targets. These markings should be in a contrasting
colour paint and permanent. No target should be positioned outside
of these marks. The flank target markings should be marked, either
on the floor or the mini mantlet, but in front of the target line. The
markings should be easily visible to all range users (a recommended
method of marking can be seen in Fig 3)
Page 89 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 3: RECOMMENDED FLANK TARGET MARKINGS
- Multi Point Targets & Target Screens. The target centre height, left and
right extent markings must be applied to the highest, left and right flank most
aiming points as shown in Fig 4.
Page 90 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 4: RECOMMENDED MULTI-POINT TARGET MARKINGS
- Range Floor Markings. To assist effective control of practices, each
lane has corresponding firing point and target numbers. For specific
range markings refer to the respective range chapter.
- Bullet Catcher/Bullet Trap. Bullet catchers or traps are provided in all
cases. The bullet catcher or trap is designed to capture the majority
of rounds fired at each target. Bullet catchers are normally
traditional sand/earth bank/ granulate steel plate design. Bullet traps
are normally those of proprietary design, such as the Snail Trap or
vertical granulate trap. For economic, logistical and environmental
reasons, indoor bullet traps are often constructed with a combination
of a bullet catcher and an area of protection to capture wide shot.
Granulated rubber traps provide cost effective and environmentally
friendly trap solutions as rounds do not tend to break up causing
lead dust. This form of trap is suitable for indoor or outdoor use. It
will be seen that the use of a bullet trap and backplate indoors
provides the same dimensions overall as sand bullet catchers used
on outdoor ranges. The dimensions of the bullet catcher/ trap
Page 91 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
components for standard ranges are provided in the respective range
chapters. Where details are not provided the details in Table 6 may
be used.
- Stop Butts. Stop butts are located around or behind bullet catchers
to capture wide shot and low ricochet. Where only judgmental
practices are conducted the stop butt may also be used as the bullet
catcher. Where stop butts are provided the criteria to determine
height and width are contained in the respective chapters. For Non
Standard NDA ranges the minimum criteria is provided in Table 6
(Page 91).
TABLE 6: DEFENCE STRUCTURE DIMENSIONS
Height And Width (C)
Indoor Outdoor
Ser Range
Component
Axis
Measured from the
LOS Low
Velocity
High
Velocity
Low
Velocity
High
Velocity
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
1 Defence zone Vertical (mils) Horizontal (mils)
215 215
215 215
215 215
215 215
2 Backplate Vertical (mils + mm) Horizontal (mils = mm)
6 + 1500 6 + 1400
n/a n/a
6 + 1500 6 + 1400
n/a n/a
3 Bullet catcher Vertical (mils + mm) Horizontal (mils = mm)
6 + 450 6 + 450
1 + 1700 1 + 1400
6 + 1500 6 + 1400
1 + 1700 3 + 1400
5 Stop Butt Vertical (mils + mm) Horizontal (mils = mm)
n/a n/a
n/a n/a
60 + 4000 60 + 4300
77 + 4700 60 + 4000
Note: See detailed calculations at Fig 2–12 (Page 135)
2.7.5 RANGE MATERIALS
Many materials have been tested for resistance to bullet penetration providing
some evidence that may be used in the design of defensive structures. Below are
performance details of the ballistic materials known to date:
Page 92 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
a. STEEL SPECIFICATIONS: When steel is specified, the requirement is for
the following BS or MOD DEF STAN specification or similar performance steel:
• Mild Steel –BS EN 10025: S275JR
• Armoured Steel – DEF STAN 95-24 or DEF STAN 95-13, AR 500 or similar has
proven effective where high velocity ammunition is used. Through hardened
armoured steel is normally used in areas of direct bullet impact.
TABLE 7A: STEEL PROTECTIVE PLATING FOR RANGES
Ser Ammunition
Defence Zone
Plate Thickness
(mm) (C)
Backplate
Plate Thickness
(mm) (C)
Bullet Catcher
Plate Thickness
(mm) (C)
Flank Direct Flank Direct
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
1 LV pistol/carbine 4 5 5 6 8 or 6 armoured
2 LV pistol/carbine jacketed
5 6 6 8 12 or 8 armoured
3 HV rifle/carbine 12 or 8 armoured Proprietary system only (see Figure 3-8: Advantages and Disadvantages of the Different Bullet Catchers on Page 168.
b. OTHER MATERIAL: Table 7b provides minimum depth of the material
required to prevent penetration on ranges dependent upon angle of strike.
Minimum material specification for concrete is 20Nmm2, Solid (void free) Class B
engineering brick, 15Nmm2 dense concrete block or hollow block filled with min
15Nmm2 concrete. Concrete, brick and block defence structures shall prevent
bullets penetrating more than 10% into the surface of the structure.
Page 93 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
TABLE 7B: MINIMUM THICKNESS (MM) OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
CONSIDERED TO BE IMPENETRABLE TO BULLET STRIKE.
Ser Ammunition Concrete
(C)
Solid
brick
(C)
Concrete
block
(C)
Timber
(C)
Remarks
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
At all angles multiple strikes.
1 LV pistol carbine 150 215 215 175 h/w or 200 s/w
Monitor effect of 4.6mm steel ammunition on all structures.
2 HV rifle/carbine 200 215 215 250 h/w or 375 s/w
No AP ammunition permitted.
Defence Zone - Single shot at 900 (1600 mils) to surface or less. (C)
3 .22” 251
751 501 125 s/w See Note 1 & 2
Defence Zone - Single shot at 70 (124 mils) to surface or less. (C)
4 .22” 251 751 501 12 s/w See Note 1 & 3
NOTES:
1. These dimensions have been rounded up to reflect sizes available.
2. Or combinations of MDF 25mm + Redland plain tile, Plywood 25mm +
Redland plain tile, 50mm s/w + Glasuron terracotta tile should contain one
.22” round.
3. Bullet Proof Glass. Where bullet proof glass is required refer to BS EN1063,
Class BR1 to BR7.
2.7.6 MATERIALS TRIALS
All ballistic trials are to be co-ordinated and authorised by the PRWP. Refer to
Reference A for details.
Page 94 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.7.7 MAINTENANCE
Where range structures are maintained within the ballistic envelope they must be
maintained to retain the original properties. The maximum depth of attrition that
should be permitted before repairs are affected is 10%. Back walls above the sand
for instance are generally at least 225mm thick. Attrition up to 22mm should not
adversely affect the performance of that component. Repairs to anti splash curtains
could cause backsplash if more than two layers are in the line of fire, ie repairs
where sheet overlap occurs. If in doubt refer to TAS (RE) for advice.
2.7.8 ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS AND SUSTAINABILITY
Range design must take account of the effect of lead, carbon monoxide, unburnt
propellant and noise. Below in Table 8 are indications of the design issues to be
addressed. Note compliant ranges are expected to fire less than 1 million rounds a
year on any one range. At this rate of fire no unacceptable environmental or health
hazard impact is predicted. Ranges with enclosed or semi enclosed firing points that
have rates of fire in excess of this should be assessed for emission hazards.
Page 95 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
TABLE 8: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS AND SUSTAINABILITY.
Range Type Lead Carbon
monoxide
Unburnt
propellant
Noise
1. Compliant Ranges
LFTTA Maintain Police Form 906 record of rounds fired on each range for future LQA.
No issue No issue Note 1 & 2
GR all types Majority of lead is removed periodically from the range.
No issue No issue Note 1 , 2 & 4
Barrack ranges All lead is removed periodically from the range.
No issue No issue Note 1, 2 & 5
Tube ranges with enclosed firing room.
Lead will be present in any dust. All lead is contained and recovered during deep clean.
With mechanical ventilation no issue. Without ventilation CO monitor required.
In any dust Note 1
Other ranges with enclosed or semi enclosed firing points.
Lead will be present in any dust. Maintain Police Form 906 record of rounds fired on each range for future LQA.
With mechanical or sufficient natural ventilation no issue. With insufficient ventilation CO monitor required.
In any dust Note 1 & 5
Indoor ranges Lead will be present in any dust. All lead is contained and recovered during deep clean.
With mechanical ventilation no issue. Without ventilation CO monitor required.
In any dust Note 1,3 & 5
Page 96 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
NOTES:
1. Hearing protection is to be worn on all firing points during practices.
2. The siting board is to ensure new ranges are sited as far away from populated
areas or offices as possible. Freehold land around ranges extending for 300m
(Nugent ruling) should be retained to preserve this separation from potential
development.
3. For indoor ranges and non standard ranges with enclosed or semi enclosed firing
points refer to Chapter 11.
4. Where 7.62mm is fired regularly (more than 50,000 rounds per lane per year)
on a range into sand or earth stop butts the RAO should commission an analysis
of the MPI to determine levels of antimony against current EU limits.
5. Where close engagement (15m or less) takes place on ranges with granulated
rubber RAO should be aware that if the granulate is exposed it could absorb
unburnt propellant that will increase the risk of fire.
2.7.9 NOISE
It is ACPO Armed Policing Guidance on Noise 2009 that all those exposed to
weapon noise must wear suitable hearing protection. There is a requirement to
reduce noise levels further by applying additional control measures. Such control
measures generally take the following two forms:
a. NOISE CONTAINMENT: The building fabric, doors, ducting etc, are
designed to reduce transmitting noise to the outside environment and to the
surrounding structure. Dense materials should be selected for the building fabric of
the firing points and bullet catcher chambers. Doors, ducts and other openings can
be specified to give a similar level of noise insulation. Advice on noise containment
should be sought from the estates department.
Page 97 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
b. NOISE ATTENUATION: The nature and treatment of internal surfaces
are selected to attenuate reflected noise (reverberation) but these measures will
not reduce the initial high level of noise produced by the weapon. There are many
materials available, such as wood, wool slab, rockwool and glass fibre, which are
very effective in reducing reflected noise. However, these materials will also
harbour lead dust and unburnt propellant, and are difficult or impossible to clean as
the fibrous materials are susceptible to damage. Whilst these materials may be
suitable for ceilings, walls should be clad with a material which withstands knock
and abrasion, and which can be appropriately cleaned. Granulated rubber tiles and
tiles of resin bound flint sand have been found effective. Proper selection and
detailing of the noise attenuation system will further enhance noise containment.
Particular care is required for tube ranges. Advice on noise attenuation should be
sought from ED.
2.7.10 LEAD POLLUTION, UNBURNT PROPELLANT AND CARBON MONOXIDE:
The requirement to control lead pollution, unburnt propellant and carbon monoxide
in ranges is given in Chapter 11.
2.7.11 HILL BACKGROUNDS
Hill background for GR, CGR and ET(LDA)R criteria are illustrated in Figure 2-4: Hill
Background Criteria on Page 126. Before a reduced RDA is authorised for use, the
following must be confirmed by TAS (RE):
For Hills or Cliffs (>56°) directly behind the Target Line. The hill has a minimum
mean slope of 56° (996 mils rounded to 1000 mils) rising immediately behind the
target line and has a minimum height of 50 m above the point at which the LofS
from the 100 m firing point meets the perpendicular from the summit. When such a
Page 98 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
slope spans the full width of the RDA trace, the reduced probability of escapement
enables the length of the trace to be reduced to the 50 m point.
For Hills or Slopes (>30°) behind the Target Line. Alternatively, the hill has a
minimum mean slope of 30° (533 mils rounded to 530) rising behind the stop butt
and has a minimum height of 100 m above the point at which the LofS from the
100 m firing point meets the perpendicular from the summit. When such a slope
spans the full width of the RDA trace, the reduced probability of escapement
enables the length of the trace to be reduced to the 100 m point described.
2.8 SAND BULLET CATCHERS
2.8.1 GENERAL
Sand has been generally used in bullet catchers and stop butts on many of the
ranges described in this Volume. This section specifies the quality of the sand, its
profile and maintenance that are necessary to capture shot without causing ricochet
or backsplash. Wet sand will have the tendency to form tunnelling on ranges where
tight grouping is expected which may result in penetration of the bullet catcher.
2.8.2 QUALITY
It is recommended that sand conforming to BS EN 12620: 2002 description "0/4
Concrete Sand". Grading should conform to BSI PD 6682-1 Table D1, "0/4 Concrete
Sand CP" with angular shape for slope stability and sound physical properties to
resist natural breakdown.' This grade is fine enough not to cause ricochet yet
coarse enough to retain the required profile effectively without likelihood of setting
or forming a surface crust; it is also relatively stable in high winds. This
Page 99 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
specification also provides for a material that will not readily breakdown naturally,
such material should not crush to fine dust when rubbed between the hands. Over
time bullets pounding the sand reduce it to fine dust behind the MPI, at this point
the sand will need to be replaced.
2.8.3 CONSTRUCTION
Table 4: SA Ammunition Maximum MV and ME Limitations (C)Table 4: SA
Ammunition Maximum MV and ME Limitations (C) on Page 71), the minimum depth
measured on a line parallel to the LofS should be 1000 mm (S) 900 mm (C) on
NDA ranges and 750 mm (S) 500 mm (C) on other ranges. For low velocity
weapons the minimum depth should also be 750 mm (S) 500 mm (C). The depth
measured perpendicular to slope of 34° is for HV 560mm(S), 500mm(C) and for LV
420mm(S) 280mm(C).
2.8.4 PROFILE
34° (600 mils) (C) is the recommended slope for the front face of the bullet catcher
in order to reduce the risk of ricochet. Rounds impacting into, or the natural
settlement of the sand, may reduce the slope which must never be allowed to fall
below 30° (530 mils) (C); as this may cause ricochet to leave the RDA.
2.8.5 MAINTENANCE
Regular maintenance of the sand is essential to the range remaining safe for use.
There are several factors to be considered and these are described below. Renewal
or replacement of the sand may be achieved by rotating the sand in situ or by
replacing it with sand from another section of the bullet catcher. The following
measures are particularly important.
Page 100 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
a. PROFILE: Sand in the bullet catcher is to be raked to prevent tunnelling
at the MPI behind targets to keep the surface of the sand in a loose state and to
restore the profile to the slope stated in section 2.8.4 Profile on Page 99.
b. DE-LEADING:
• 7.62 mm: When large quantities of 7.62 mm rounds are fired, or there
are excessive quantities of jacket and bullet debris, balls of lead and other
hazardous debris build up in the sand. The bullets tend to remain intact after
impacting into the sand and can fuse together into a ball, which often occurs
below the surface of the sand at the MPI behind the target after about
20,000 rounds have been fired in a lane. When subsequent bullets striking
the ball no longer drive it deeper into the sand, backsplash and ricochet
become hazards. So it is important that any such build-up of lead is
removed before the hazards arise.
• 5.56 mm: This round tends to break up on impact at close range causing
debris which is often smaller than the sand particles in the bullet catcher. In
this case the sand cannot always be sieved without altering its stability.
Provided the lead particles and debris are small and well spread over the area
behind the MPI, the sand will remain stable and the probability of ricochet or
backsplash will remain low. It is prudent to rotate the sand to ensure that the
smaller particles are well spread. If there is any sign of lead balling and
debris building up to the extent that a backsplash hazard is perceived, the
sand is to be treated as described in sub-paragraph “7.62mm” above.
• Other Ammunition Natures: When other ammunition natures have
been fired (such as 9 mm, black powder ball or bullet, shotgun slugs etc), the
sand is to be monitored regularly to ensure lead does not build up around the
MPI. As a guide, the sand should be checked for lead build-up when the slope
is raked after heavy use to restore its profile. For a range that is only used
Page 101 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
occasionally, the sand should be checked monthly or after 20,000 rounds
have been fired on a lane, whichever occurs first.
c. WEATHERING:
In time, continuous impact by shot will break the sand down to a fine powder which
will blow away in the wind or bake hard in the sun. Fine sand will also cause the
slope to loose its stability. When this occurs, which will be evident by inspection,
the sand will no longer be of the prescribed grade and should be replaced. The
following additives and reinforcements have been found useful in maintaining the
shape of the sand:
• Wood Shavings or Chips: A mixture of wood shavings or chips in
proportions by Volume of about 2:1 sand/wood helps retain moisture and
stability of the mass in sand under canopies. The wood will itself break down
in time and more will need to be mixed in.
• Salt: Adding 1-2% of salt by dry weight of sand also helps retain moisture in
the sand and will reduce the danger of freezing in winter.
• Netting: Mesh netting or geogrid, may be used to reinforce the face angle.
The mesh is placed just below the surface of the sand and is held in place
with wooden pegs. Light galvanised wire mesh may also be used as it is
effective against burrowing rabbits.
• Timber support: Timber supports in the form of boxes or herringbone
within the sand clear of the MPI can assist the retention of the sand profile.
d. CLEANING:
Sand bullet catchers should be checked at least weekly to ensure surface bullet
debris is removed and monthly or after 20,000 rounds have been fired on a lane to
Page 102 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
ensure there is no build-up of lead which can generate a backsplash hazard.
Rotation of the sand within the bullet catcher may prolong the life of the sand. The
sand should be replaced when the maintenance of the 34° face becomes difficult.
The hazard of lead contamination has to be considered. The RAU is responsible for:
• Observing the requirements of the Control of Lead at Work Regulations.
• The safety of working practices.
• Providing the appropriate personal protective clothing and, when necessary,
respiratory protective equipment.
• Providing washing and changing areas which avoid cross- contamination of
clothing.
• Disposing sand, soil and debris, which might contain or be contaminated by
lead, as contaminated waste in accordance with the Local Authority
Environmental Control Department's instructions and Police Policy.
e. BLACK POWDER WEAPONS
On ranges where firing black powder weapons is permitted, particular care is to be
taken to avoid lead building up in the stop butt and mantlet.
Page 103 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.9 GRANULATED RUBBER BULLET CATCHERS
2.9.1 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
The granulated rubber should be used in the same form as sand traps, 340
slope(S), 300 (C) with profile line marked on barrack range side walls. The rubber
elements are shredded from rubber that has no steel or fabric reinforcement.
a. SHAPE:
Shredded rubber with elongated elements removed to produce angular rubber
fragments that are of regular shape approximately 10 – 25 mm in any direction
producing tight interlock properties. There are sufficient suppliers who are able to
meet this specification so the person with management control of the facility should
not accept granulate for bullet traps with any visible contamination or elongated
rubber.
b. DURABILITY:
The rubber material will start to break down to fine particles after around 20,000
rounds per lane unless there is an exceptional high rate of fire over extended
periods where the material may break down sooner. The granulated rubber traps
are to be de-leaded regularly (see below) and any fine particles removed and
replaced by topping up with new material. With effective maintenance these traps
should never need total replacement.
c. De leading:
The material should take up to 20,000 rounds per lane before inspection is required
to ensure there is no build up of lead behind the MPI and that the rubber at the MPI
is not converted to fine particles. Frequent prodding of the area behind the MPI will
extend the interval for de-leading. On ranges where black powder weapons or
shotguns are fired, more frequent de leading may be necessary. Contractors
involved in de leading are to ensure all bullets, bullet debris, fine rubber dust and
target debris is removed from the granulate.
Page 104 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
d. FIRE RESISTANCE
The material is susceptible to fire in certain conditions. The risk of fire may be
minimised by good maintenance and minimising the accumulation of fine rubber
particles, target debris and exposed fabric reinforcement in the granulate. The
depth of granulate is to be kept to the minimum specified in this chapter as heat
will increase with the depth of material. Shooting in boxes will limit the amount of
granulate needed and these are to be used in gallery range stop butts. A light
hessian type cover may be used to contain the granulate as this will allow heat to
dissipate more readily. Dense rubber tiles are not to be used for this purpose. On
ranges where engagement closer than 10m is permitted, a light rubber sheet over
the granulate is essential to prevent unburnt propellant falling into the granulate
increasing the risk of fire. On ranges where high rates of burst weapon practices
are undertaken, water for dousing the granulate after firing is to be provided.
Tracer is not to be fired into granulated rubber traps.
e. STABILITY
Due to the interlock properties the 340 slope should be maintained throughout
many days of use without raking. Only with a high rate of fire on one lane will a
depression become apparent behind the MPI.
f. FROST RESISTANCE
The material may be used outside during frost conditions without any change in
performance.
g. WASHOUT RESISTANCE
The material allows water to pass through it without disruption of the slope.
h. RISK ASSESSMENT
A formal site specific risk assessment is to be produced on each range where
rubber granulate is used to ensure all fire prevention measures have been
Page 105 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
implemented. Advice from the force fire advisor via the Estates Department may be
sought where necessary.
2.9.2 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
Rounds are captured either intact or in constituent parts, lead dust is not generated
in the trap to the same degree as in a sand trap. The rubber granulate should not
break up into fine dust like sand so there is no particulate thrown into the air during
firing or maintenance of the trap. Like sand, there is no impact noise. The granulate
may be recycled many times on site to remove spent bullets the granulate is then
placed back into the trap.
2.9.3 MAINTENANCE
As the material has good interlock properties so the compliant slope is maintained
without slip at the MPI this will reduce the maintenance effort considerably. As
there is little or no lead dust, any maintenance of the trap will not expose range
staff to significant levels of lead in air. The material will not breakdown so readily as
sand so replacement or rotation of the trap need not be so frequent. Rabbits do not
like tunnelling in this material. Most suppliers are able to provide a de leading or
replacement service using a re cycling process on site. To ensure the granulate is
not contaminated by wood and paper debris from targets on barrack ranges it is
advisable to provide a light rubber sheet covering the granulate. Regular and
effective maintenance as recommended by the supplier is essential as rubber dust
generated at the MPI mixed with bullet and target debris will increase the risk of
fire. To ensure the maintenance cycle is maintained on ranges where use of only
one or two lanes are regularly in use the range warden is to record such use in the
Form 906 to ensure the bullet count per lane is recorded.
Page 106 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.9.4 POTENTIAL USE
This material may be used in outdoor ranges or indoors. When used on gallery type
ranges it should be used only in shooting in boxes fitted into the stop butt to
minimise costs and reduce the area affected should there be a fire. For use near
environmentally sensitive or populated areas the addition of a suitable fire
retardant should be considered. Complete bullet catches on barrack ranges may be
converted to this material. No additional works are required except to retain the
material at the base of the bullet catcher. This material is suitable for indoor ranges
including test facilities and tube ranges. It will reduce considerably the amount of
lead dust in the range.
Note:
(Some German and US ranges used the material sandwiched between rigid plastic
sheets in the vertical form. These have proven very expensive to maintain due to
the need to dismantle the trap when the supporting sheets are shot out at the
MPI.)
2.9.5 DEPTH OF GRANULATE
The granulate is expected to stop 5.56 mm and 7.62 mm rounds within 300-400
mm. The depth of the granulate in line with the line of fire at the top of the trap for
high velocity ammunition is to be maintained at 900 mm. For low velocity weapons
the minimum depth should be 750 mm (S) 500 mm (C) in the direction of the line
of fire. For shooting in boxes in stop butts the depth perpendicular to the surface
should be maintained at 400 mm (T).
Page 107 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.9.6 DISPOSAL
This material may be recycled by the supplier. At no time should the granulate as a
whole need to be removed for disposal as the regular maintenance will remove and
replace broken down granulate.
2.9.7 CONTACT DETAILS
For further details and potential suppliers contact TAS (RE).
2.10 IMPACT AREAS
2.10.1 IMPACT AREAS - GENERAL
An impact area/zone is a space on a RDA authorised and applied permanently, or at
the time of firing, in which specified projectiles may impact, detonate, break up or
operate. The impact area must be large enough to contain ricochet but have its
edge no closer to the DA/Z boundary than the authorised BSD or other hazard
distance. In pursuance of the policy set out in HPRS Volume 1 to protect the public
from the hazardous effects of weapon firing, access to the area has to be controlled
as directed by the RAO or CFI. Firing has to cease if a member of the public or
other unauthorised person is detected entering the impact area. This section
outlines the principles of the measures required but the degree of their provision
will depend on the risks assessed by the CFI for the particular range.
Page 108 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.10.2 CLOSED IMPACT AREA
A closed impact area is that part of the impact area known to contain or is
suspected of containing unexploded ammunition (blinds) which is not designated a
controlled impact area. The whole area, including firing points, should be fenced to
prevent access and a demarcation fence or structure is provided to separate the
cleared area from the impact area. (see Para 2.11.1 General, on Page 111 and To
Provide Security on Page 114) and the appropriate warning signs displayed. Access
beyond the demarcation fence is prohibited to all persons except those involved in
the clearance of ordnance. Where the area has to be grazed for environmental or
fire reasons, animals are allowed in, but under no circumstances must they be
followed in by humans. Approved Prohibition and Warning signs on the demarcation
fence should direct "No Entry to Impact Area" and "Warning UXO" or similar
wording (The symbol is regulated, the text is not). The CFI should ensure personnel
do not enter the area before EOC is completed. Injured animals must be destroyed
from outside the Closed Impact Area.
2.10.3 CONTROLLED IMPACT AREA
A controlled impact area is one which is known or thought to contain surface or
sub-surface blinds but due to public rights of way and the like, access to the public
cannot be totally denied. During firing the impact area is closed. When the absence
of red flags or lights signifies that firing has ceased and the range paths have been
cleared, controlled access is permitted. Police personnel and farmers who have
good reason to enter the area must be fully briefed on the specific dangers in the
area. The control of access to these areas is provided by a combination of well sited
warning signs and notices together with flags and, where necessary, way marking
or fences to direct or funnel the public away from danger. Actual siting and detail
will vary from range to range and is very much dependant upon local awareness
and activity.
Page 109 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.10.4 OPEN IMPACT AREA
This is an impact area where, with a high degree of confidence, all identified blinds
are destroyed after firing has ceased. The range cannot be opened to the public
until all blinds are found and destroyed unless the known area of the blind is
secured against access until the blind is destroyed. There must be sufficient
provision to ensure that during firing the public are warned that firing is taking
place and that firing can be stopped when necessary. The range boundary should
be clearly and appropriately signed with red flags and lights to indicate when the
range is in use.
2.10.5 IMPACT AREA SITING
An impact area is sited so as to ensure that the probability of a projectile falling
outside the impact area is minimal. Target siting and topography need to be
carefully considered. When topography cannot be relied upon to capture all
projectiles, constructing a stop butt should be considered. Any fence line should, as
far as possible, be sited out of the firer's field of view. Where the fence passes
through close country, a clear strip is to be maintained on the outside of the fence
to ensure that the safety signs can be seen and the public will not be encouraged to
cross the fence.
2.10.6 FIRING POINTS
Where weapons are fired that have a rear danger area firing points should be
provided inside the fenced area. In closed impact areas such firing points are
located clear of the actual impact area and the fence is extended around them. To
ensure officers on the firing point do not move into the actual DA, a smaller
demarcation fence should be provided (with warning signs) to separate the two
areas.
Page 110 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.10.7 GATES
Fenced impact areas will require gates of a suitable size to be sited at strategic
points. Gates are particularly obtrusive and only the minimum number should be
provided. Where possible they should be out of the firer's field of view. Gates will
be required for:
a. CLEARANCE AND DISPOSAL OF BLINDS:
Clearance and disposal of blinds, including those in designated areas for public
access on controlled impact areas, will be necessary. This may involve armoured
earth moving plant.
b. SERVICING TARGETS.
How targets are moved into and out of the area needs consideration, i.e. towing or
winching.
c. GROUNDS MAINTENANCE
Tree, shrub and grass growth may need to be controlled.
Page 111 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.11. CONTROL OF ACCESS
2.11.1 GENERAL
This section specifies the various measures available used to control access. Which
method is best suited to a particular site will be apparent from the risk assessment.
In some cases the measures are influenced by local Bylaws and local tradition. The
risk assessment will determine the minimum requirement to ensure adequate
control measures are in place to effectively control public access into the range
danger area. Control of access between ranges on range complexes should also be
included in local risk assessments. Where public access is permitted between the
Police boundary and a Range Danger area boundary, warning triangles should be
used on the outer boundary indicating police training and where horses are known
to use the area, sudden noise. Prohibition signs and flags / lights in this case are
placed at the range danger area boundary. See also Reference A1 (Volume 1) that
includes more information on Risk Assessments.
2.12 FENCES
2.12.1 CLASSES OF FENCES
Four classes of fencing are specified for various conditions and levels of access
control onto open ranges. All are used in combination with signs. The levels of
access control are:
• To provide demarcation
• To discourage access
• To prevent access
• To provide security
Page 112 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.12.2 SELECTION
The selection of the type of fence or marking will depend upon local risk
assessments. Factors that will influence the choice will include;
• Extent of public access. - Authorised, unauthorised, children
• Nature of the hazard and the degree of risk
• Ground conditions - practicalities of constructing a fence
• Possible overreaching the fence from trees or ground
• Whether the fence will be shot away
• Whether animals or bird life will be caught in the fence
2.12.3 DEMARCATION
Demarcation of the range boundary may be all that is necessary in remote areas
where there is no immediate threat to life and limb. However, thought should be
given to the marking of impact areas and to denote designated routes for public
access. Three strand fences or marker posts may be used to denote particular
areas. A demarcation fence is also used inside closed impact areas to separate the
firing point from the impact area. Inter visible safety signs are to be provided on
fencing. Colour coded demarcation posts may only be effective where there is no
public access and all Police personnel are fully briefed on the location and colour
coding of the posts. In areas prone to deep snow or snow drifts, the posts may
have to be taller.
Page 113 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.12.4 TO DISCOURAGE ACCESS
In a controlled impact area and in areas where occasional public activity may be
expected, a fence to discourage access is to be provided. Such fences should not be
crossed or climbed through easily. Consideration should be given in the risk
assessment for the protection of minors. In farming areas where animals graze,
stock fencing should be provided. BS 1722 provides guidance on fence systems.
2.12.5 TO PREVENT ACCESS
In areas where the hazard is such that the risk assessment determines that
uncontrolled access must be prevented, a more substantial fence is required. Chain
link is designed in such a way that it is difficult to climb but it is easily cut and
unwound. Weld mesh fencing is a more substantial barrier but is more expensive.
In accordance with the Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations, a
suitable fence is required to meet the risks identified in the risk assessment.
a. TYPE OF FENCE:
If there is no evidence of vandalism or of children breaking through existing fencing
a chain link fence may be suitable. Where such problems are known to exist a more
substantial fence or combination fence may be needed.
b. HEIGHT OF THE FENCE
The fence must be high enough to prevent access by all but the determined
trespasser. In low risk areas a 1 .4m fence is sufficiently high to prevent an adult
stepping over it from flat level ground. In high risk areas where children are known
to climb existing fences, more substantial fencing will be required.
Page 114 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
c. TO PROVIDE SECURITY
Security fences are normally 2m high with canted top section. Refer to local
Command security advisors for details.
2.13 SIGNS AND NOTICES
2.13.1 GENERAL
Police ranges and training areas present a variety of hazards that may affect all
those entering the area. Risk assessments should identify the hazards and their
level of risk. Byelaws place a legal duty on the public to comply with access control
measures. Safety signs are provided to prohibit and warn those at risk of the
hazards. When it is impracticable to use signs within a training area to separate
areas with different levels of hazard, demarcation posts may be used. Notices are
also used to provide additional information and clarification but they must not
replace safety signs.
2.13.2 POLICE POLICY AND CURRENT LEGISLATION
Signs and notices are used in conjunction with fences on boundaries and
demarcation lines to prohibit, warn and inform people of the potential
consequences of entering Police ranges and training areas. Police policy is set out in
HPRS Volume 1. Current legislation, on which Police policy is based, is The Health
and Safety (Safety Signs and Signals) Regulations. Overseas Police policy is to
comply with the local or host nation's procedures on signs and sign posting;
however, if that level of safety is less than that provided in the UK, additional signs
may be necessary to warn British police personnel. Where there is an interface
between the host nationals and a British police managed range, it will be necessary
Page 115 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
to have British signs as well as host nation signs, especially if those signs are in a
foreign language. Signage covering Public Access Legislation is covered in
appropriate regulations. The requirement is to ensure that training area and range
safety signs permit access when it is safe to do so. Signs that have the message
“Keep Out” or “No Entry” without qualification should only be used where it is
necessary to prohibit access at all times.
2.13.3 DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES
There are a number of sign systems in place, each supported by different legislation
or regulation. Notices are not regulated and should only be used to inform or
supplement safety signs, and not to replace them. The following types of sign may
be required on ranges and training areas. The list is not exhaustive and more
details may be found in the relevant documentation.
a. BYELAW
The local byelaw is a detailed explanation of the rights and measures by which
Police may legally control access to its property. Byelaws take time to come into
force due to the consultative process between the local authority, local interest
groups and ED which represents Police interests. As byelaws are difficult to amend,
every effort should be made to predict future changes and requirements at the
consultation stage. Byelaws must be displayed at the interface between the track,
path or route where it crosses the range boundary.
b. SAFETY SIGNS
Standard safety signs are to be provided when the risk cannot be managed by
other means. Safety signs are covered in Health & Safety (Safety Signs & Signals
Regulations). A safety sign must include a symbol and may have text. However,
text alone is incorrect. The proportion of symbol colour against the overall size of
Page 116 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
the sign is provided in brackets below. The five types of safety sign, which are
described at Table 9: Safety Sign Colours and Shapes on Page 117, are:
1. Prohibition. (Symbol at least 35% of the area of the sign).
2. Warning. (Symbol at least 50% of the area of the sign).
3. Mandatory. (Symbol at least 50% of the area of the sign).
4. Safe condition. (Symbol at least 50% of the area of the sign).
5. Fire. (Symbol at least 50% of the area of the sign).
c. DEMARCATION POSTS
When it is not practicable to sign an area where two levels of risk exist within a
range or training area, demarcation posts may be used. These should be clearly
visible, and their meaning and location explained to those entering the area.
d. TRAFFIC SIGNS
To avoid confusion, roads across Police property used by the public should be
signed as for national public roads. When on public roads these signs are subject to
planning controls and are the responsibility of the Local Authority. In the UK signs
are regulated by the Traffic Sign Regulations and General Directions 2002.
e. NOTICES
Notices, such as "OUT OF BOUNDS", are not regulated and they are used to inform
or provide additional information. The Police have traditionally used combinations of
red and white for background and lettering but in rural areas the Police may be
encouraged to use other colours. Notices are not to be used instead of safety signs
but may supplement them (see also section 2.13.6 Supplementary Text and Notices
on Page 118).
Page 117 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
f. NIGHT SIGNING
Although red lights are used when a Range is in use at night, it may be
impracticable to use lights or illuminated signs around or across a training area.
However, traffic signs on roads used by the public through a training area should be
in reflective paint. There is no requirement to provide additional signs that a
training area is used at night.
2.13.4 SHAPE AND COLOUR OF SAFETY SIGNS
BS 5378 – 2 outlines safety signs and colours. BS 5499 – 2 outlines graphical
sybols and signs.
These are given in Table 9.
TABLE 9: SAFETY SIGN COLOURS AND SHAPES
Ser Colour and
Shape
Meaning or
Purpose
Examples of Use Contrast
Colour
Symbol
Colour
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
1 Red circle
with diagonal
band
Stop
Prohibition
No entry, No access White Black
2 Yellow
Triangle
Caution Warning
Risk of Danger
Hazard indication(fire,
explosion, chemical, etc)
Black Black
3 Blue Circular Mandatory action Obligation to wear
personal safety equipment
White White
4 Green square Safe condition Identification of safety.
Fire escape routes
White White
5 Red square Fire Fire equipment. Fire point White White
2.13.5 APPROVED SIGNS
Page 118 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
The prohibition and warning signs for use on range boundaries are shown in Figure
2-6: Range Prohobition and Warning Signs with Example Text on Page 129, Figure
2-7: Prohibition Signs on Page 130, and Figure 2-5: Range Danger area Boundary
Prohibition Sign with Example Text on Page 128. Other common range and training
area signs are shown in Figures 2-6 to 2-9. If an appropriate symbol is not shown,
other symbols may be used provided they are as simple as possible and omit
details not essential to their understanding. To maintain conformity on ranges and
training areas in the UK, any new symbol should be approved by the PRWP.
Supplementary text may be added below the symbol to denote one of the
categories given in Table 9 above.
2.13.6 SUPPLEMENTARY TEXT AND NOTICES
Supplementary text may be used in conjunction with a safety sign to aid
understanding. Where there are known concentrations of people whose first
language is not English, dual or even triple language notices may be necessary. A
supplementary notice is oblong or square. The background colour is the same as
the safety colour used on the safety sign it is supplementing with the text in the
relevant contrasting colour. Supplementary text is provided on a rectangular
background, colour coded to match the sign. For example, it is wrong to
supplement a prohibition sign with the text "Danger", which is the subject of a
warning sign. In this case it may be appropriate to display two signs, an example of
which is shown in Figure 2-8 on Page 131, of:
a. A prohibition sign with supplementing text prohibiting entry under certain
conditions.
b. A warning sign with a symbol and supplementing text which warns of the
danger.
Page 119 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
2.13.7 LETTERING STYLE
The preferred letter style is Helvetica Medium or similar. The initial letter of a
sentence or proper noun shall be upper case and the remainder in lower case.
However, all the letters of a heading, an imperative or a cautionary word may be
upper case.
2.13.8 SIGN SIZE
BS 5499-4 gives advice with regard to sign size and viewing distances. Both state
that the size must be sufficient so that the safety sign is clearly seen by those to
whom it is directed. Therefore, as each sign has to be judged on its importance, the
size is to be agreed between the chain of command and ED.
2.13.9 POSITIONING OF SIGNS
Care has to be exercised in positioning safety signs to ensure that they are
displayed where people might reasonably expect to find them, such as at barriers,
gates, junctions, clearings, footpaths etc. On long runs of fencing the interval
between signs will be dictated by the importance of the information displayed on
the sign. In any event people should not be expected to follow a fence for too long
before being informed of its significance. Police policy (HPRS Volume 1) requires
boundary signs to be inter visible provided normally at 100 m intervals. When
demarcation posts are used, these should be inter visible. Safety signs must not be
obscured by vegetation, open gates, parked vehicles or other obstructions, and
must be checked and cleaned at regular intervals. Too many signs can be confusing
and should be avoided. Byelaws should provide all necessary details leaving safety
signs to emphasise the major areas of concern. Where the public are permitted
onto Police land between the Police boundary and any range danger area, warning
signs with “Police Firearms Training” or similar should be used on the outer
Page 120 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
boundary and prohibition signs flags and lights at the range danger area boundary.
The aim is to ensure a clear message is passed to the public to ensure their safety.
2.13.10 RETROSPECTIVE ACTION.
Providing the safety signs exist, the obligation to comply with the Health and Safety
(Safety Signs and Signals) Regulations 1996 or this HPRS does not require
retrospective action but when signs are changed or replaced, they are to conform.
To avoid confusion, signs that do not conform to the Regulations or this HPRS
should not be mixed with those that do.
2.13.11 BOUNDARY RESPONSIBILITY
Normally the ED will be responsible for fencing, signs and byelaw notices around
the boundary of ranges and training areas. In any event the ED's advice should be
sought before fencing and signs are erected as local planning and conservation
regulations may have to be observed.
2.14 FLAGGING / RED LIGHTS
2.14.1 GENERAL
There are three common uses for red flags used on Police ranges. Red lights are
normally provided for use at night.
Page 121 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
a. BOUNDARY FLAGS
It is best practice to fly red flags, and at night show red lights, around a RDA to
indicate that a range is in use and/or a residual hazard remains. They are normally
located in areas of maximum visibility or next to main access points where signs
and notices provide an explanation. The policy is set out in HPRS Volume 1.
b. RANGE IN USE FLAGGING
Respective chapters provide advice on the location of these flags. It is important
that they are flown in prominent positions on a particular range. Local conditions
will dictate the most appropriate position where they are most easily seen by those
approaching a range. Where there are a combination of range types such a one
range half converted to CGR only one range in use flag is required unless the
ranges are allocated separately.
c. BUTT FLAG
Used to indicate safe access from and into the butts.
2.15 SURVEILLANCE AND SENTRIES
The policy for surveillance and posting sentries on ranges is set out in HPRS Volume
1. The requisite works requirements for barriers and towers will be specified in the
project brief for the particular range or training area.
2.16 WORKS RANGE STRUCTURE INSPECTIONS
The range structure is classed as any structure from the furthest firing point to the
bullet stop or stop butt including any structure on the range floor that may be
struck by bullets. This includes isolated structures on training areas used for live
firing such as overhead firing towers. The RAO annual inspectors look only at the
Page 122 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
ballistic safety of a range. Where bullet attrition, weather or age may affect the
stability of a structure it is the local works organisation who will identify issues
relating to the stability of range structures. A range works inspection guide is
provided by TAS (RE) to NPIA for all works officers that have ranges in their areas
of responsibility.
Page 123 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 2-1: BALLISTIC ANGLES
Page 124 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 2-2: CALCULATING STOP BUTT HEIGHTS NDA RANGE (EXISTING
RANGES ONLY)
Page 125 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 2-3: CALCULATING STOP BUTT WIDTHS NDA RANGE (EXISTING
RANGES ONLY)
Page 126 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 2–4: HILL BACKGROUND CRITERIA
NOTES:
a. The logic behind the hill background criteria applied to standard ranges is
that the hill will capture any rounds without inducing further ricochet. No
hill provides an even slope. However, to prevent ricochet the slope must
exceed 30° (533mils). Slopes around 30° (533mils) will generally have
areas where ricochet might occur, hence the increased height requirement.
Slopes that average 56° (995mils) are unlikely to have ricochet inducing
surfaces and therefore the height is reduced to 50 metres.
Page 127 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
b. Trees and scrub cannot substitute for a hill background. There is no
proven data on the ability of trees and scrub to capture high velocity
projectiles.
c. On hill backgrounds that rise directly behind the stop butt, all backsplash
or ricochet inducing material in the hill should be removed or screened.
Page 128 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 2-5: RANGE DANGER AREA BOUNDARY PROHIBITION SIGN WITH
EXAMPLE TEXT
Normally used around the Range Danger Area (RDA) in conjunction with red flags
and red lamps at main access points. Where there is sufficient land around the RDA
for dry training and or public access, these prohibition signs are placed around the
actual RDA with warning signs around the outer police or training area boundary.
Where this is not the case, these signs are normally placed clear of the actual RDA
using natural features such as fences and hedges to help define the controlled area.
Police Firing Range
Keep out when red flags are flying or red lamps are lit
Page 129 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 2-6: RANGE PROHIBITION AND WARNING SIGNS WITH EXAMPLE TEXT
This example shows a sign that might be used around controlled impact areas or
training areas where military debris such as pyrotechnics, smoke canisters etc may
be found.
Police Firing Range Keep out when
barriers are down
Page 130 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 2-7: PROHIBITION SIGNS
Police Training Area
Page 131 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 2-8 WARNING SIGNS
Reference BS 5499 - Safety Signs and Colours
1 - SPECIFIC WARNING SIGNS
Where a particular hazard is reflected in the specific warning sign examples provided, these should be used. Where there is no specific warning symbol available, use the non specific examples illustrated below.
2 - NON SPECIFIC WARNING SIGNS
Page 132 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 2-9: MANDATORY SIGNS
Page 133 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 2-10: SIGN SIZE CHART
Reference BS 5499 - Safety Signs and Colours
All Dimensions in Millimetres unless otherwise stated
Modular Height of
Safety Sign Plate
a
Diameter or Height of
Geometric
Shape of Safety Sign Plate
b
Height of
Lower Case Letters
75 60 5.0 100 80 6.6 150 120 10 225 180 15 300 240 20 600 480 40 750 600 50 900 720 60 1200 960 80
a is the modular height of a sign plate, for a safety sign or supplementary sign.
b is the diameter or height of the geometric shape of a safety sign.
FIGURE 2-11: STANDARD FIRING POINT DETAIL
Page 134 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Page 135 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIG 2-12: NON STANDARD NDA BULLET CATCHER (BC) AND STOP BUTT (SB) DIMENSIONS
(All measurements are in metres)
Low Velocity
(9mm)
High Velocity
(5.56mm/7.62mm)
BC SB BC SB
Distance Height
Width
Prone Kneel Stand Prone Kneel Stand Prone Kneel Stand Prone Kneel Stand Remarks
H
1.65
1.65
1.65
5.80
6.30
7.00
1.725
1.725
1.725
6.92
7.42
8.12
25m
W
1.55
1.55
1.55
5.80
5.80
5.80
1.475
1.475
1.475
5.50
5.50
5.50
H
1.80
1.80
1.80
7.30
7.80
8.50
1.75
1.75
1.75
8.85
9.35
10.05
50m
W
1.70
1.70
1.70
7.30
7.30
7.30
1.55
1.55
1.55
7.00
7.00
7.00
H
1.95
1.95
1.95
8.80
9.30
10.00
1.775
1.775
1.775
10.78
11.28
11.98
75m
W
1.85
1.85
1.85
8.80
8.80
8.80
1.625
1.625
1.625
8.50
8.50
8.50
Page 136 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Low Velocity
(9mm)
High Velocity
(5.56mm/7.62mm)
BC SB BC SB
Distance Height
Width
Prone Kneel Stand Prone Kneel Stand Prone Kneel Stand Prone Kneel Stand Remarks
H
2.10
2.10
2.10
10.30
10.80
11.50
1.80
1.80
1.80
12.70
13.20
13.90
100m
W
2.00
2.00
2.00
10.3
10.3
10.3
1.70
1.70
1.70
10.00
10.00
10.00
H
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1.90
1.90
1.90
20.40
20.90
21.60
200m
W
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2.00
2.00
2.00
16.00
16.00
16.00
H
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2.00
2.00
2.00
28.10
28.60
29.30
300m
W
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2.30
2.30
2.30
22.00
22.00
22.00
Notes: 1. The width distance is taken from each outside line of fire.
2. The BC height distance is taken from the target centre height (TCH) (usually 800mm from the bottom of the BC) and is on the assumption that ground strike between firer
and target is eliminated. The actual TCH is to be added to the BC height distance in the above table to obtain the final BC height required.
3. The Stop Butt heights already include the different posture heights from prone, kneeling and standing therefore no additions are required.
Page 137 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 3: Indoor Ranges
3.1 INTRODUCTION
3.1.1 AIM
The aim of this chapter is to give the design and construction details for existing
and new indoor ranges. Those involved in the planning of new ranges should also
refer to the Type Standard that contains much more detail for new facilities.
3.1.2 DESCRIPTION
Indoor ranges are constructed to meet many training requirements. The main
advantage of indoor ranges is that they provide protection from the elements and
external noise can be reduced. The main disadvantage is that noise is more of a
problem for range users and weapon emissions become a key safety issue. These
disadvantages also affect any range with enclosed or semi enclosed firing points.
Indoor ranges may be traditionally constructed and protected to meet ballistic
requirements, or they may be specifically constructed as a range. Ranges are at
times constructed in tunnels or in existing buildings converted for range use.
Proprietary purpose built indoor ranges are available provided in modular sections
or constructed on site. Refer to Chapter 5 for all tactical shooting Indoor Ranges
3.1.3 PURPOSE
There is a demand for indoor ranges which, like the tube range, allow any
authorised weapons.
Page 138 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES
In all cases reference shall be made to Chapter 11, Control of Hazardous
substances in Indoor Ranges. For ranges where air weapons are used refer to this
chapter.
3.2 DESIGN
3.2.1 GENERAL
Indoor ranges present ballistic and potential environmental problems for the
designer. The structure must contain all shot without causing damage or injury
from ricochet or backsplash. Environmental problems include noise, particularly
reverberation, airborne contaminants including lead, carbon monoxide pollution and
unburned propellant. An outline layout of a traditional indoor range is illustrated in
Figure 3-1: Typical Layout Indoor 25 Metre Range on Page 162. The backsplash
hazard and ballistic limitations are given in Table 2 on Page 50 and Table 4: SA
Ammunition Maximum MV and ME Limitations (C) on Page 71. Existing ranges were
generally designed with a maximum range of 25m. New ranges can be constructed
for many situations and distances with the design based on the ammunition nature
and using both the vertical and horizontal components of the worst case firing
positions.
3.2.2 COMPONENTS
The capture of bullets fired in an indoor range relies upon defence structures, the
sizes of which are deduced from a series of safety angles. The required degree of
protection increases with the probability of strike. The structures (safety features)
which produce the level of protection are called components. These and their
purpose are:
Page 139 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
a. DEFENCE ZONE
The defence zone is the part of a range which may be struck by unintentional shot,
ricochet or backsplash. The zone is specifically designed to resist penetration of the
occasional single shot.
b. BACKPLATE
The backplate is constructed behind and around the bullet catcher, and is designed
to capture predicted shot that misses the bullet catcher. Therefore the backplate
must resist the penetration from multiple direct fire and ricochet.
c. BULLET CATCHER
The bullet catcher is designed to defeat and capture the majority of direct fire and
ricochet and must withstand continuous attrition.
d. FLOOR
The floor of the range is to have a smooth impenetrable surface free of any
protrusion or indentation which could generate a high ricochet or backsplash.
3.2.3 COMPONENT SIZES
The data given in Table 6: Defence Structure Dimensions on Page 91 is used to
calculate the required sizes of the bullet catcher, back plate and defence zone (see
also Figure 3-2: Defended Structure Details on Page 163). Table 7a: Steel
Protective Plating for Ranges on Page 92 provides the material thickness considered
suitable to prevent single round penetration.
Page 140 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.2.4 DESIGN
Each component may be sized using the following guidelines;
a. VERTICAL AXIS
The LofS is established by determining:
• The maximum and minimum target centre height to be permitted on the range.
• All firing postures applicable to that range: - Standing 1500 mm (C).
- Kneeling 800 mm (C). - Prone 300 mm (C).
NOTES:
a. If a raised firing point is to be used, its height is to be added to the firing
posture height.
b. The LofS from all firing postures is projected from all firing distances to target
centres. From the line so produced, the angle taken from Table 6 on Page 91
is struck to determine the height of the appropriate range component.
c. The range component is taken to extend down to the range floor in all cases.
b. HORIZONTAL AXIS
The LofS is established from the centre of all flank firing positions to that
flank target centre. The angle found in Table 6 is projected to determine the
minimum width of the range component.
Page 141 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.2.5 BACKSPLASH HAZARD
Care is needed to ensure any structure down the range either stops the bullet or is
sufficiently weak to allow the bullet to pass through without great loss of energy.
Where a bullet is decelerated on its way down range it may not penetrate the anti-
backsplash curtain and therefore may bounce back to the firing point. To minimise
this hazard targets should be fixed with light material, timber less than 25mm,
plastic, cardboard, string, netting or Hessian. Where timber is increased in
thickness to capture bullets, be sure there is no chance of a round cutting through
the corners of the timber generating a backsplash hazard.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION
3.3.1 RANGE BUILDING
A building with a minimum length of firing distance plus 10m is required to allow for
the construction of firing points and bullet catcher. Each firing lane shall be in
accordance with Para 2.7.4 Range Components on Page 85. A clear height of 600
mm should be provided above the LofS at the firing points and 250 mm above the
LofS at the target (see Para 3.9.1 Lower Clear Vision Line on Page 153). The floor,
ceiling or roof and all walls within the defence zone should be of solid construction
to contain all shot. The thickness of various types of construction to contain shot is
given in Table 7a: Steel Protective Plating for Ranges on Page 92.
3.3.2 ADJOINING ROOMS
Where other occupied rooms or passageways adjoin the range, or where the range
floor or ceiling separate it from other floors, the complete area of the separating
structure must be protected. Timber floors or ceilings may have to be protected
Page 142 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
over their complete area the details of which are given in Table 7a: Steel Protective
Plating for Ranges on Page 92. Alternative shot resistant materials may be used on
ranges provided they are approved by Police. The reduced material specification for
engagement at 7° (125mils) or less should not be used where there are adjoining
rooms. Noise reduction measures may be required if the adjoining rooms are
occupied.
3.3.3 DOORS AND WINDOWS
In new ranges, the inclusion of doors and windows in the protected area should be
avoided. In existing buildings all windows and unnecessary doors must be sealed up
and rendered impenetrable. The range entrance door and any vehicle entry and exit
door should be located behind the rearmost firing point. One other door may be
required by the Fire Officer for emergency exit, located down-range but preferably
not in the defence zone. All down-range doors within the protected areas should be
flush with the wall otherwise the reveal has to be baffled or clad to prevent
backsplash. Down-range doors within the defended area must be impenetrable to
any direct fire, ricochet or backsplash with all furniture protected from strike. These
doors are to be fitted with a panic bolt, fitted so that its status is obvious to the
RCO, or a push bar regardless of other locks, fitted so that its status is obvious to
the RCO. All down range doors are to be controlled by the RCO. Where it is possible
to open down range doors from the outside, an audio visual alarm must be fitted.
Control measures are required outside the main access door warning against entry
when the range is in use. Where a range opens onto a public area, a secondary
outer door may be necessary to overcome the problem of vandalism or to reduce
noise. Red lights or notices, or a combination of the two may be used to provide the
control measures. Where it is difficult to see a red light in daylight a sign on or near
the door that indicates “Range in use Keep out” or “Range not in use” may be used.
Page 143 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.3.4 VENTILATION
The requirements for ventilation in all indoor training ranges are given in Chapter
11. New ranges should be designed to minimise the potential for air turbulence.
Services and other obstructions in the range must be baffled for protection and
such baffles will cause air turbulence in the range. To overcome this, the envelope
may be designed to minimise this effect by sloping floors, walls and ceiling to
provide recesses in which Services or obstructions may be safely placed. See Figure
3-9: Alternative to Baffles on Page 169 for details.
3.3.5 DUST CONTROL
Dust in the range will contain contaminants such as lead and unburnt propellant.
Both cause environmental problems and should be removed. All indoor ranges must
be constructed to minimise the level of dust. All unnecessary surfaces such as
shelves, open cupboards or roof members should be removed or sealed. Walls,
ceiling and floors should be designed or covered with surfaces which are impervious
and easily cleaned.
3.3.6 SAFETY SIGNS
The risk assessment for the range will determine what safety signs are required.
Details of the ballistic related signs are illustrated in Chapter 2, Pages 128 to 133.
Other signs covered by SHEF may be required.
Page 144 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.4 DEFENCE ZONE
3.4.1 REQUIREMENTS
The positions of the defence zone in the range structure are shown in Figure 3-2:
Defended Structure Details on Page 163. It is essential that all parts of the
structure within the defence zone are impenetrable to shot (see Chapter 2, Table
7a: Steel Protective Plating for Ranges on Page 92, and Table 7b on Page 93).
Alternatively, the defence zone may be protected by baffles as specified in section
3.12 Baffles on Page 154 (however see section 3.3.4 Ventilation on Page 143 re air
turbulence). In some circumstances additional baffles may be required to contain
ricochet. No Services or other obstructions whether temporary or permanent, which
could cause ricochet or backsplash, should be in the defence zone. Any protrusion
unavoidably in this area must be protected and obstructions clad to prevent
backsplash. The area of the defence zone is calculated using Table 6 on Page 91.
3.4.2 FIXINGS
Any fixings used in the defence zone must not cause backsplash or excessive
ricochet (see Chapter 2, Page 86).
3.5 BACKPLATE
In new ranges, a backplate is used where necessary to provide added protection
around the bullet trap. In low velocity ranges the backplate is the part of the back
wall, around or behind the bullet catcher, which is designed to be struck by a poorly
aimed shot. The complete backplate area may be, depending on the building fabric,
protected by steel plate. On very narrow or low ranges this area may extend down
the sidewalls, floor and ceiling. The size and thickness of the backplate are
calculated using Chapter 2 Table 6: Defence Structure Dimensions on Page 91 and
Page 145 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Table 7a: Steel Protective Plating for Ranges on Page 92. To prevent backsplash the
backplate area in direct line of fire and any protruding surfaces or baffles in this
area must be protected by the anti splash curtain or be clad by a material, typically
timber boarding generally fixed to battens, that will prevent backsplash. The
battens provide a gap where the bullet energy can dissipate without damaging the
back of the boarding and are fixed vertically to allow bullet debris to drop out.
Backsplash cladding is described in Backsplash and Ricochet Protection on Page 86.
Hidden attrition as described in section 2.7.2 Safe Design on Page 81 must also be
considered.
3.6 BULLET CATCHER
The bullet catcher must safely stop and contain all correctly aimed shot. There are
many variations available. Examples with respective advantages and disadvantages
are illustrated in-Fig. 3-5 to 3-8 on Pages 165 to 168. For low velocity ammunition
modern environmentally friendly bullet catchers are available and should be used.
For high velocity ammunition there are modern trap systems available but
only the "Snail" sand and granulated rubber traps have been successfully
tested by Police. Existing low velocity ranges often have the minimum
requirements outlined in Figure 3-2: Defended Structure Details on Page 163 and
Figure 3-3: Clear Vision Line (T) on Page 164. In this case the bullet catcher and
the backplate are to be firmly fixed to a sound brick, blockwork or concrete wall.
Steel plates should be mounted so that sheets are flush to each other, preferably
with fixings made flush. The bullet catcher plates should be so arranged that the
target positions will not coincide with the edges of the steel sheet.
Page 146 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.6.1 THE SAND BULLET CATCHER (LV AND HV)
The traditional sand faced bullet catcher is ballistically suitable for all weapons.
Details of sand bullet catchers are provided in Chapter 2, Page 98. It is however not
the ideal solution indoors due to the dust and cleaning problems associated with
such traps.
3.6.2 VERTICAL STEEL PLATE WITH ANTI-SPLASH CURTAIN (LV ONLY)
This design is simple and reliable, and breaks up the round on impact. Backsplash
is prevented by an anti-splash curtain in front of the plate. A timber batten on the
floor behind the curtain helps contain lead fragments. The main disadvantage of
this trap is noise and the lead dust generated by bullet impact on the steel plate.
The size and thickness of steel plate may be determined from Table 6: Defence
Structure Dimensions on Page 91, and Table 7a: Steel Protective Plating for Ranges
on Page 92. To minimise reverberation and noise when the bullet catcher is struck,
an absorbent layer should be sandwiched between the steel sheet and the back
wall. A sacrificial plate will increase durability at the MPI, especially if pistol is to be
fired. As continued strike will buckle this plate, it should be fixed to allow for creep.
Fixing bolts and screws should be countersunk.
3.6.3 ANGLED STEEL PLATE WITH ANTI-SPLASH CURTAIN (LV ONLY)
A single steel plate deflects rounds downwards to a bullet stop at floor level. It is
effective but less safe and reliable than the vertical plate. Deflected rounds may not
behave in a predictable manner and there is a much higher reliance placed on the
anti-splash curtain. Multiple deflectors of the "Venetian blind" type are only to be
used with an anti-splash curtain fixed in front of and clear of the bullet catcher.
Page 147 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.6.4 SNAIL BULLET TRAP (LV AND HV)
This trap is a patent design by Savage Arms Corps of USA and is suitable for all
lead based ammunition types. During 2006 the specification of the “Snail” trap has
been upgraded to cater for the introduction of steel ammunition. The use of steel
ammunition in existing “Snail” traps should not cause sudden failure but inspection
of the impact surfaces in the throat of the trap will be necessary to ensure wear is
not taking place. The bullet catcher works by directing the bullet into a tight spin
allowing the round to decelerate whilst contained within the trap. Lead dust is still
produced but is contained. Noise remains a problem with this type of catcher. Such
catchers once properly installed should need little maintenance. It is however
expensive and the range must be designed to accept the high point loads and
component size of the Snail Bullet catcher which does have a large footprint. See
Figure 3-6 on Page 166.
3.6.5 GRANULATED RUBBER TRAPS (LV AND HV)
The vertical granulated rubber trap and the reclining granulated rubber trap used at
a natural angle of repose are very cost effective and environmentally friendly
solutions. Details of these traps are provided in Chapter 2, illustrated at 3-6 on
Page 166.
3.6.6 OTHER BULLET CATCHER SYSTEMS
There are many bullet catchers available commercially (see figure 3-8: Advantages
& Disadvantages of the Different Bullet Catchers on Page 168), more for low
velocity than for high velocity. Whichever trap system is selected it must meet the
following safety criteria:
Page 148 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
a. It must be fit for the purpose for which it was intended. It must capture
all rounds safely without inducing ricochet or backsplash.
b. Where centre bull targets are used the trap must be able to withstand
heavy localised attrition without excessive deterioration.
c. The catcher must be easily inspected in depth to provide assurance that
penetration resistance is effective.
d. The bullet catcher ideally should capture rounds intact eliminating lead
dust problems in the bullet catcher.
e. Impact noise should be minimised.
f. The bullet catcher should require only occasional maintenance and
there should be no element that cannot be maintained by range staff.
g. It should be cost effective in use.
3.7 ANTI-SPLASH CURTAIN
3.7.1 MATERIAL
Any bullet catcher that may generate backsplash must always be provided with an
anti-splash curtain. Only the sand bullet catcher, the Snail Bullet Trap and
granulated rubber traps may be used without a curtain. The curtain material is 6
mm (S) thick soft latex rubber or similar police approved material. It is required to
resist penetration by a deflected round and to contain backsplash without damage
to the rear of the curtain. Patching in areas of overlap is therefore not permitted.
Page 149 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
The use of wadcutter and similar ammunition may render the antisplash curtain
unsafe.
3.7.2 FIXING
The anti-splash curtain is clamped to or fitted with hooks and eyelets to hang it
onto the pelmet to cover the complete area of the bullet catcher in such a way that
deflected rounds or backsplash cannot escape (see Figure 3-3: Clear Vision Line
(T) on Page 164). Curtains should be hung in such a way to enable rotation of worn
sheets and ideally shifting the MPI to extend the life of the curtain.
a. The curtain hangs approximately 300 mm (S) in front of the bullet
catcher to ensure the rear of the sheet is not damaged by the break up
of the rounds on the steel plate.
b. It overlaps the pelmet side cheeks which require protection from
backsplash.
c. Each sheet overlaps the adjacent sheet by approximately 150 mm (S)
ensuring that even if the hanging curtain is not exactly vertical full
coverage will be achieved.
d. To prevent the curtain curling, a timber batten is fixed near the bottom
of each sheet, staggered back and front on alternate sheets.
e. The curtain is to hang just clear of the floor.
f. The maximum number of layers of anti splash curtain that can be used
to ensure there is no backsplash is two. Patching over the areas of
overlap is prohibited.
Page 150 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
g. Due to the extremely low velocity of air operated weapons, there is a
serious risk of backsplash from pellets that do not penetrate the
backsplash curtain. Where a range is used for air weapons it will be
necessary to make provision to remove the backsplash curtain or fit an
additional pellet catcher curtain of hessian or similar material.
3.7.3 PELMET
The pelmet is a timber shelf with side cheeks to prevent deflected rounds or
backsplash escaping. The inner surfaces of the pelmet are lined with 3 mm thick
steel to reduce the attrition caused by continued strike.
3.7.4 ANTI-SPLASH CURTAIN REPAIR
Latex rubber curtain is expensive. It can however have a very long service life,
even on a heavily used range. The curtain should be moved around to prevent
holing at MPI. Holes in the curtain can be patched once with material cut from
another sheet and fixed with a suitable adhesive available from the manufacturer.
Precautions must be taken when handling lead contaminated sheets. Latex rubber
is flammable and must be kept clear of heat sources such as target lights.
Page 151 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.8 TARGETRY
3.8.1 TARGETS
There are many target systems available for indoor ranges. Static projected target
or scenic, video film or live relay and computer generated target arrays. The
electrically operated turning target mechanism provides realistic training. A man
sized target or, ideally, two man sized targets should be fitted per lane. A lane
width of 1.6 m is required to give half target width separation within a lane and a
full target width separation between lanes. If this cannot be achieved, reduced
sized proportionate targets can be substituted.
3.8.2 TARGET MECHANISMS
Target mechanisms should be protected against damage, backsplash and ricochet.
The protection required is established from the worst case line of fire and the
closest engagement distance. It should be of bulletproof and lightweight
construction with no fixings that may cause ricochet or backsplash. If the bullet
catcher is fitted with an antisplash curtain and timber is used it should be softwood
and the total thickness not greater than 25mm thick to ensure after penetration
there is sufficient energy to penetrate the anti backsplash curtain. Many suitable
fixing methods are available for targets.
3.8.3 MOVING TARGETS
Moving targets may be possible in some indoor ranges, the arrangement for which
may be assessed by NPIA as the application of specific safety criteria is necessary.
Such targets may only be used on police indoor ranges after the CFI has considered
the implications and the RAO has authorised their use in accordance with HPRS
Volume 1.
Page 152 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.8.4 TARGET POSITIONS
The maximum target centre height and flank target positions are essential features
in the design of the range as they determine the size of all range ballistic elements.
Its safe operation cannot be assured if the proper height and position are not
maintained. In the case of multi-point targets or screens, the target centre of the
outermost targets is used to place the targets. The ruling target centre height and
flank target positions must be marked on the range sidewalls and floor respectively.
This may indicate maximum and minimum heights when the range is designed for a
variety of targets. Positioning targets in accordance with the guidelines in Chapter 2
para 2.7.4 on Page 85 should assist in providing sensible parameters for target
positioning and enable a realistic line of fire, whilst not compromising the safety of
the range.
3.8.5 TARGET LIGHTING
A simple row of fluorescent strip lights in an angled reflector, set into the range
floor, ceiling or surface mounted with baffle or angled component protection may
be adequate for most shooting. Further detailed information can be found in Note
F2 1.8 Lighting Police Buildings Design Guide 1994.
3.9 FLOOR
Any protrusions that may generate backsplash or ricochet on the range floor will
require additional protection. Preferred materials are thick rubber, thermoplastic or
vinyl sheet. Timber floors should be sealed and have filled joints to prevent a build
up of lead dust and unburnt propellant. See also para 3.13.3 Firing Lanes on Page
157 for the requirements if pistols are fired without benches.
Page 153 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.9.1 LOWER CLEAR VISION LINE
There are to be no obstructions on the floor that interrupt the lower clear vision line
(see Chapter 2, Page 84, and Figure 3-3: Clear Vision Line (T) on Page 164).
3.10 WALLS
3.10.1 WALLS AND SOUND ATTENUATION.
Walls outside the defence zone should be clad with a sound attenuating material
which will effectively reduce reverberation. The defence zone should also, where
possible, be similarly clad. It will be necessary to consider the effect of strike on the
material selected for the defence zone. The detailed design of sound attenuation
may vary considerably from one building to another. Raking in the walls and
stepping back for services will also provide some reduction in reverberation back up
the range. LV ranges may not require such a high level of attenuation as HV
ranges. Selected wall finishes need to be durable to resist the knock and abrasion
inevitable in a training range. The finish should be smooth, joint-free, and
withstand frequent cleaning and wet scrubbing with agents to remove and
neutralise lead dust and unburnt propellant.
Page 154 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.11 CEILING
3.11.1 CEILING OR ROOF AND UPPER CLEAR VISION LINE
The ceiling or roof, ceiling or roof members including baffles, and all fixtures and
fittings should be above the upper clear vision line so as to provide sufficient clear
height for safe firing (see Chapter 2 and Figure 3-3: Clear Vision Line (T) on Page
164).
3.11.2 SOUND ATTENUATION
In buildings with a high ceiling or roof above about 3.5 m, sound attenuating linings
to the roof or ceiling may be less necessary. With low ceilings or roofs, sound
attenuating lining or a suspended ceiling may be required. The need for durability
and to withstand cleaning, as previously described, is less essential.
3.12 BAFFLES
3.12.1 PURPOSE
Baffles are used on an indoor range to:
a. Protect fixtures and fittings from strike.
b. Prevent rounds escaping where the walls or roof in the defence zone
are not sufficient to prevent penetration by shot. The effect of baffles is
however limited (see para 3.12.2 Locations on Page 155).
Page 155 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.12.2 LOCATIONS
Baffles are generally placed only to prevent direct shot escaping or to protect
fixtures and fittings. They will not completely eliminate the danger of ricochet
escaping the range due to the random nature of ricochet angles. The range
structure within the defence zone must in all cases be impenetrable to ricochet. As
there is no data for ricochet use the detail for low angle strike in Chapter 2 Table 7a
Steel Protective Plating for Ranges on Page 92. Baffles may be vertical or
horizontal. They are designed with respect to each firing point and from each firing
posture for which the range is designed: standing, kneeling or prone. It must not
be possible for the firer to see any item protected by a baffle or to see between
baffles which are protecting the defence zone. Baffles protecting the defence zone
are designed so that the soffit of each baffle overlaps subsequent baffles by at least
150 mm when viewed as just described. The clear vision height should be
maintained below the soffit of each baffle and the clear vision line maintained as
described in section 2.7.3 Design Criteria on Page 83. Baffles will disrupt laminar air
flow (See section 3.3.4 Ventilation on Page 143).
3.12.3 ANGLED BAFFLES
Any baffle in the defence zone within the backsplash distance of a firing point is
angled to prevent backsplash and to ensure that strike will ricochet down-range and
not towards the walls or roof (see Figure 3-4: Baffle Construction on Page 164).
Due to the proximity of the hazard and to provide greater backsplash protection,
angled baffles should have an enhanced timber cladding of:
a. Low velocity: 50 mm boarding on 25 mm battens.
b. High velocity: 75 mm boarding on 50 mm battens.
Page 156 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.12.4 MATERIALS
Materials used for constructing baffles are to conform with Chapter 2 Table 7a:
Steel Protective Plating for Ranges on Page 92 so that shot penetration is
prevented. Cladding to prevent backsplash should be of a suitable ballistic material
which allows the round to pass through and to capture backsplash without damage
to that material. Where high velocity ammunition is used, particularly steel
ammunition, the effectiveness of the steel can be extended by reducing the strike
angle below 15°. Detail of baffle construction is shown at Figure 3-4: Baffle
Construction on Page 164. For fixings see Chapter 2, para 2.7.2 Safe Design on
Page 83.
3.13 FIRING POINTS AND LANES
3.13.1 FIRING POINTS
When firing is conducted from the prone position, a raised platform approximately
450 mm high can be provided. This reduces the possibility of ricochet from low
shots hitting the range floor. It may be built into the range floor or be a free
standing structure. It should be about 2.5 m from front to rear with a fall of 1:12
from the front edge. The firing point should be surfaced with a smooth impervious
material that can be vacuum cleaned and damp mopped. Carpets or other items
that will trap lead dust and unburnt propellant are not to be used in the range.
3.13.2 PISTOL BENCHES OR RICOCHET PROTECTION
If pistol is to be fired, using a bench to prevent the pistol being lowered below waist
level is strongly recommended. This ensures that unintentional discharge during
handling drills will not strike the range floor close to the firer and cause dangerous
Page 157 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
ricochet. If pistol benches are not used, the floor for 2 m in front of the firer must
be constructed of smooth, bulletproof, impervious material to prevent backsplash.
3.13.3 FIRING LANES
The position of each firing lane should be clearly indicated on the firing point and
each lane numbered. Minimum permitted lane widths are:
a. Low velocity Pistol and Carbine: 1 m with screens or 1.8 m without screens to provide protection from ejected cases and space for coaching.
b. High velocity Rifle and Carbine: 1.8 m SS or 2.5m A.
c. Flank Clearance: Each flank should provide a 0.5 m clearance, parallel to the flank LofS, down the complete length of the range (see Chapter 2).
3.13.4 FIRING LANE WIDTH
In designing lane width and the depth of the firing point, consideration has to be
given to:
a. Screens: These assist preventing adjacent firers being distracted by noise and ejected cartridge cases when firers are close together.
b. Coaches/Supervisors: On any training range it is desirable that space is provided for a coach/supervisor to work beside each firer.
c. RCO: The RCO has to be able to move freely behind the firers and to
have a clear view of all activity on the firing point.
Page 158 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.14 FIRE HAZARD
3.14.1 HAZARDS
When specifying materials for range construction, their fire rating must be
considered. Materials such as rubber compounds and timber can present a fire
hazard. This, combined with factors such as heat from target lighting and the
presence of un-burnt propellant, require that careful consideration is given at the
design stage to fire prevention. A light rubber sheet over granulate rubber traps will
prevent target debris and un-burnt propellant getting into granulated rubber,
minimising the fire risk. This is particularly important where close engagement
practices are authorised. Means of escape should conform fully to current Fire
Regulations.
3.14.2 APPROVAL
Attention is drawn to the Building Regulations 2000, Approved Document B1. The
advice and approval of the ED Fire Officer is mandatory for all new or reconstructed
indoor ranges.
3.15 COMMUNICATIONS
A means of summoning the emergency services, ideally a land laid telephone, is to
be available.
Page 159 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.16 MAINTENANCE
3.16.1 RESPONSIBILITIES
Maintenance is the responsibility of the CFI. Responsibilities may be divided as
follows:
a. Range Warden: See HPRS Volume 1 Chapter 2, para 2.4.4 Muzzle Velocity and Muzzle Energy Limitations
b. Property Management: General inspection (see Volume 1, Chapter 2, para 2.3.1 General) with particular emphasis on the: - Condition of the range structure.
- Stability of the back wall behind the bullet catcher.
- Warning signs and interlock safety systems.
- Prevention of dust accumulating out of sight.
- Ventilation system functioning properly (if fitted).
c. Equipment Management: Repairing and servicing equipment
installed by single Police contract.
3.16.2 FREQUENCY
Proper maintenance is dependent upon good liaison between the CFI, Range Safety
Inspectors and the ED supported by a properly scheduled maintenance programme.
A heavily used range may need one day's maintenance each week plus one or two
days' maintenance by appointed staff each month. Two closed periods of a week or
so may be needed each year for building and defence structure repair. For
frequency of de leading ranges refer to Chapter 11, deep cleaning. Proprietary trap
systems should be de-leaded in accordance with suppliers recommendations. The
annual range inspector should determine when low use ranges are de-leaded.
Page 160 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3.16.3 RANGE CLEANING
Range cleaning is an important factor in maintaining a safe range. Range cleaning
including the requirements for routine and deep cleaning is contained in Chapter
11.
3.16.4 BULLET CATCHER
Regular inspection of the bullet catcher backplate and pelmet lining should
determine that no excessive buckling, displacement or splitting of the steel is
evident. Steel plate which is showing signs of failure must be replaced. Bullet
catchers may also need frequent emptying and frequent cleaning.
3.16.5 RANGE STRUCTURE
Other than the bullet catcher area, it should be very rare for the range structure to
be struck. Apart from the bullet catcher, the range structure should be inspected
regularly for damage from shot strike. Any strike is to be marked, and the cause
investigated and recorded in the Range Log Form 906. When such damage in the
defence zone is significant, it is to be repaired immediately.
3.17 COMPLIANCE CHECKS
The following are to be checked:
a. Authorised weapons, ammunition and practices (Range SOPs).
b. Defence Zone, backplate and bullet catcher correctly sized and specified.
Page 161 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
c. Floor, walls and ceiling clear specified for sound absorption and dust inhibiting surfaces free from obstruction or correctly protected.
d. Backsplash / ricochet hazards eliminated. Baffles (if any) correctly positioned and detailed.
e. Targets and firing points correctly sized and positioned.
f. Target centre height and flank positions clearly identified.
g. Adequate ventilation and lighting.
h. Correct safety signs number and location.
i. Adequate access and egress.
Page 162 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 3-1: TYPICAL LAYOUT INDOOR 25 METRE RANGE
Page 163 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 3-2: DEFENDED STRUCTURE DETAILS
Page 164 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 3-3: CLEAR VISION LINE (T)
FIGURE 3-4: BAFFLE CONSTRUCTION
Page 165 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 3-5: BULLET CATCHER CONSTRUCTION
Bullet Catcher Width
Bullet Catcher Height
Backplate Height
Page 166 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 3-6: TYPICAL INDOOR RANGE BULLET TRAP DETAIL (HIGH OR LOW
VELOCITY AMMUNITION)
Page 167 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 3-7: TYPICAL INDOOR RANGE BULLET TRAP DETAIL (LOW VELOCITY
AMMUNITION)
Page 168 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 3-8: ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF THE DIFFERENT BULLET
CATCHERS
Reference: Type Standard TS/02
Bullet
Catcher
Type
Ammunition
type
Advantages Disadvantages
Sand All • • • • • • •
• •
Traditional system Inexpensive No noise Suitable for target or judgmental shooting Fall of shot visible
•
Dust in range and catcher (lead & unburnt propellant) Maintenance costs Lead break up Environmental hazard Disposal costs Attrition at MPI
Flat steel Low velocity • • & Anti - only • backsplash • • curtain • • •
Traditional system Inexpensive Suitable for target or judgmental shooting Small foot print
•
Dust in catcher (lead & unburnt propellant) Lead break up Cost of Linatex Fall of shot not clear. Attrition at MPI
Snail All • • • • • •
•
Low cost in use Minimal maintenance Suitable for target or judgmental shooting
•
Lead break up Noise High initial cost Large footprint Fall of shot not clear. Older versions suitable for lead ammo only.
Granulated All • • Rubber •
• •
Reclining (R) • • + Vertical (V) • •
•
Little round break up No lead dust No noise Low maintenance Low cost in use Suitable for target or judgmental shooting Reduced footprint (V)
•
(R) Same footprint as sand Fine rubber dust on high use ranges. Fall of shot not clear. Cover sheet attrition at MPI Fire risk particularly when not fully maintained and with tracer. Some loss of rubber in high impact area (V).
Curtain Low velocity • • (Open) only • • Polymer / • PVC compound sheet
•
•
Large footprint Low velocity use only
•
No round break up No lead dust No noise Very low maintenance No cost in use (judgmental shooting) Low cost in use (Target shooting) Effectiveness visible
Curtain / All • • herringbone • • Rubber • • recycled conveyor belt
No noise Smaller footprint Suitable for target or judgmental shooting •
•
Attrition at MPI Rounds captured in rubber Effectiveness not visible Anti backsplash sheet required High maintenance cost for target shooting
Page 169 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 3-9: ALTERNATIVE TO BAFFLES
Page 170 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 4: Open Non Standard No Danger Area Range
4.1 INTRODUCTION
The aim of this chapter is to describe the design and construction details for an
Open Non Standard NDA range.
4.1.1 GENERAL
The No Danger Area (NDA) range is defined at section 2.2.29 Range (Zone) on
Page 60. The Non Standard NDA range requires particular attention as each will
differ in the way compliance is achieved dependant upon many factors. Therefore
this chapter will define in some detail the process of design to achieve compliance
with current authorised criteria. Design principles in Chapter 2 are applied to
determine the extent of defence structures. However, no defence structure will be
specified less than that established for the criteria shown in Figure 2-2 on Page 124
that have proven to be safe over a long period of use.
4.2 DESIGN PROCEDURES (NEW OR MODIFIED RANGES)
4.2.1 RANGE SAFETY ADVICE
For police facilities, any work affecting ranges, whether new build, refurbishment,
modification or major repair should be co-ordinated with TAS as the Technical
Authority for compliance and functional aspects. For non- police facilities, advice on
range safety, ballistic resistance and functional aspects may be obtained from TAS
Page 171 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
on request of the authorised NPIA officer who has responsibility for inspection of
ranges against police standards and subsequent issue of safety certification.
4.2.2 STRUCTURAL ADVICE
For police facilities, the force ED should be consulted for all aspects of structural
integrity and stability as the Technical Authority for all structural engineering and
works aspects. For non-police facilities those responsible for the work need to
satisfy themselves as to the suitability of the overall design and the competence of
those involved in all aspects of design, building or refurbishment work.
4.2.3 PRELIMINARY PLANNING
Consultation at an early stage enables provision of advice regarding individual
locations and also ensures that planned work complies with functional requirements
and standards of ballistic resistance. Detailed designs, specifications and all
relevant details should be submitted prior to works commencing. All submissions
should be forwarded to the NPIA who can then, if necessary, seek TAS (RE) advice.
4.3 DESIGN
4.3.1 SITING
During the preliminary planning process the following hierarchy of factors should be
considered for the initial siting of an NDA range:
Page 172 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
a. POPULATION:
The orientation of the range should be such that where possible the direction of fire
is away from habitation.
b. SUNLIGHT:
To avoid direct sunlight affecting range users, firing in a northerly direction is
preferred. (South in the southern hemisphere).
c. NOISE:
Since impulse noise such as that produced on an open range is difficult to contain,
siting the range at the greatest possible distance from populated areas is the most
effective way of reducing noise nuisance.
d. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT:
Consideration should be given to the type of structure, materials used and overall
appearance of the completed facility, and the resulting visual and environmental
impact on the surrounding area.
e. GROUND PROFILE:
Ideally NDA ranges should be sited to achieve a Line of Fire (LofF) which is
approximately horizontal or slightly depressed from firing point to target.
f. LOCAL FACTORS:
Full consideration should be given to local factors, conditions, risks and any other
relevant information when formulating site specific design solutions.
g. ACCESS:
Access is required for range users and for maintenance works. The range boundary
should have controlled access with respective areas suitably signed and, where
appropriate, fenced or otherwise marked as described in Chapter 2, Pages 111 to
Page 173 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
114. Local assessment of site specific risks is required to determine additional
control measures necessary.
4.3.2 RANGE COMPONENTS
Full descriptions of range components are provided in Chapter 2. Specific to Open
Non Standard NDA ranges are the following;
a. FIRING POINTS:
For longer engagement distances elevated firing points will help avoid ground strike
within the predicted CofF.
b. TARGETRY:
A suitable target area with clearly defined target positions provides easily
identifiable points of aim. In the design process it is the aiming point of a target
that is important. There may be more than one aiming point on a single target
therefore worst case LofS must be applied to each from all possible firing positions.
c. RANGE FLOOR:
The range floor includes the length from the rear of the furthest firing point to the
toe of the bullet catcher and the width between the flank firing points to the extents
of the stop butt. The area of the range floor should be constructed to eliminate, so
far as is reasonably practicable, any hard ricochet inducing materials and surfaces.
The layout of the range floor requires detailed consideration; particular attention is
required for each firing point, the likely first point of impact and potential for
ricochet from the surface of the range floor.
Page 174 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
d. RICOCHET PIT:
A potential for ricochet exists where the appropriate cone of fire criteria coincides
with the range floor. The use of ricochet pits or sloping range floors may eliminate
or reduce the possibility of ricochet occurring.
e. BULLET CATCHER:
The bullet catcher is the area directly behind the target position which is subject to
constant attrition; its purpose is to continually stop bullets in free flight and low
ricochet while providing a structure which is easily maintained and cost effective.
Sand is currently the most common material used for bullet catchers although
granulated rubber is now authorised for use and provides a far more effective bullet
catcher. See Chapter 2, Pages 98 to 107 for recommended details and
specifications for both types. For low velocity ammunition environmentally friendly
and cost effective in use proprietary traps exist refer to TAS for details.
f. STOP BUTT:
The stop butt is the area extending above and to the sides of the bullet catcher and
should be subjected to lesser concentrations of fire. Its purpose is to stop direct
shot in free flight within maximum predicted aimer deviation margins and ricochet
from the predicted first point of impact. Where banks form the stop butt the
minimum slope of 56° is required for NDA ranges. Details are provided in Fig.2-2
(page 124), 2-3 (page 125) & 2-4 (page 126).
g. PROTECTION OF HARD SURFACES:
Where exposed hard surfaces or objects are likely to be struck, there is a potential
for high angle ricochet or backsplash to occur. Features should be incorporated to
provide protection, for example by the use of timber, earth (sloped at a minimum
of 56°) or other suitable material to cover the area of concern. This minimises the
risk of injury to those within the range from backsplash and to those outside the
boundary from ricochet. Care must be taken to avoid situations where hidden
Page 175 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
attrition may occur. Rounds passing through soft material leave almost no mark of
their passing. However when high velocity rounds impact on a hard surface, that
surface may break up. It is important that all defence structures can be inspected
for such attrition to ensure the protection required is maintained.
4.3.3 COMPONENT DESIGN.
a. BULLET CATCHER:
The bullet catcher size requirements can be established by application of a parallel
distance and an associated angle to the `worst case' LofF in Chapter 2 Table 6,
page 91.
b. STOP BUTTS / BACK WALLS:
The required height and width of stop butt for a specific range can be determined
by applying relevant cones of fire, ricochet allowances and existing range criteria.
Application of all these elements is necessary as in some circumstances the
calculations for cone of fire and ricochet may result in smaller stop butt dimensional
requirements than needed using previous NDA criteria. As a reduction in the level
of safety cannot be accepted, the criteria for existing ranges is also applied and
whichever the greater is to be adopted (See section 4.1.1 General on Page 170).
c. CONES OF FIRE (C of F):
These are applied to all LofF to determine the extent of direct fire and
predicted initial points of impact on the range floor. The stop butt should be
sized and positioned to capture all predicted direct shot and ricochet from the
range floor. Authorised CofF are provided in Table 3: Authorised SA Cones of
Fire to be Applied on Police Ranges on Page 54.
Page 176 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
d. RICOCHET ALLOWANCE:
To determine the extent of predicted ricochet, an angular allowance is applied from
the initial point of impact where the appropriate cone of fire strikes the range floor.
In many cases the resultant height and width of ricochet departure angle exceed
the direct shot element of the cone of fire. With careful design of the ground profile
it is possible to eliminate or minimise the effects of ricochet by providing a
combination of sloped range floor, ricochet pit, and/or raised firing points. The
ricochet angles to be used are 15° for LV weapons and 30° for HV weapons. Angles
to be measured from the range floor.
e. EXISTING RANGE CRITERIA:
Chapter 2, Figures 2-2 (page 124) and 2-3 (page 125) provides the details
necessary to determine stop butt heights and widths using existing range criteria.
This range criteria shall be used in addition to the cone of fire and ricochet criteria
with the resultant highest and widest dimensions used to determine the stop butt
requirements.
4.4 CONSTRUCTION
4.4.1 FIRING POINT
Construction may be of grassed earth, aggregate or similar. For a grassed firing
point only a treated timber board, set on edge flush with the ground, is needed to
show the actual position; while for aggregate typical construction should be 10mm
(T) single sized aggregate to a thickness of 100mm (T), laid on a suitably
compacted, free-draining base. Aggregate should be surrounded by treated timber
boards, set on edge flush with the surrounding ground level, to assist in retaining
the firing point area surface. Where the prone posture is adopted, the ground level
Page 177 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
should be raised to elevate the weapon above the range floor. This reduces
potential ricochet by increasing the distance to predicted first point of impact. A
standard firing point is illustrated in Chapter 2 at Figure 2-11 (page 133). For
enclosed or semi enclosed firing points refer to Chapter 3, Page 156.
4.4.2 TARGETS
Impenetrable targets are not normally used on NDA ranges as this creates
problems with ricochet and backsplash. Typical target backing construction is thin
plywood, corrugated plastic and hessian screens supported on timber framework;
although any similar penetrable construction is acceptable. Only approved targets
may be used on police ranges. Various forms of target support and mechanisms
may be used. Examples include simple timber posts and sockets, hand operated
swivel target mechanisms and radio/remote controlled and programmable turning
target mechanisms. It is also possible to use pop up target mechanisms. In all
cases the mechanism shall be either penetrable, or suitably protected from strike if
consisting of any hard surface.
4.4.3 RANGE FLOOR
The range floor should be reasonably level, firm and free- draining to prevent
ponding. It should have a depth of 150mm (T) topsoil, sand or other soft material
free from stones >30mm (T). Soil should be seeded or turfed to prevent erosion.
Particular attention is needed to cover any exposed hard surfaces / target
mechanisms on the range floor.
Page 178 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
4.4.4 BULLET CATCHER
The bullet catcher should be positioned immediately behind the targets to achieve
its function; the distance may vary although a distance of 1000mm (T) from target
line to bullet catcher toe-board provides sufficient space for access to targetry. As
the distance from target to toe-board increases, the defensive structure
requirements become greater. Details of sand and granulated rubber bullet catchers
are provided in Chapter 2, Pages 98 to 107.
a. PROFILE:
Provided the profile is maintained the majority of bullets should be contained within
the catcher, the exception is some high velocity rounds which have a tendency to
'pop-over' - see below.
b. CANOPY:
Where high velocity centre fire rifle ammunition is to be used, an anti-ricochet or
`pop-over' canopy is required to prevent vertical ricochet from the bullet catcher
sand leaving the range. The canopy shall be positioned to cover the full width and
depth of the bullet catcher. Where the canopy is of timber constructions, the rear
half of the underside is to be lined with steel minimum 5 mm thick across the full
width of the canopy. The sides of the canopy are to be impenetrable to ricochet and
any debris ejected from the bullet catcher sand, and is typically constructed of brick
or block. Other materials, such as concrete may be used provided that they contain
“pop-over”, are weather resistant and are low maintenance, noting that the rear
half of the canopy underside will take the largest proportion of ricochet. The leading
faces of the canopy and supporting walls should be clad to prevent backsplash.
Where high velocity centre fire rifle ammunition is to be used without a canopy
above the bullet catcher, a 100 m radius danger area is required to the sides and
rear of the range (measured from the flank target positions at sides and stop butt
Page 179 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
for extent of DA to the rear). Alternatively the whole area of the bullet catcher may
be constructed with a slope in excess of 56 degree thus preventing ricochet.
4.4.5 STOP BUTT
Typical construction used for stop butts include vertical walls, quarry walls, natural
earth embankments, manufactured bunds and cutting into natural hill features. The
slope angle for an earth embankment stop butt is 56° (C) from the horizontal which
is traditionally accepted as the angle which eliminates ricochet. Table 10 at page
179 indicates the recommended thickness and type of materials often used in the
construction of stop butts. Other solution may also be possible - Refer to Compliant
Ranges on Page 67.
TABLE 10: STOP BUTT MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NDA RANGES (C)
Material Type
Vertical Wall
Weapon/Ammunition
Type
Concrete
Note 1
Brickwork
Note 2
Blockwork
Note 3
Earth
Embankment
Notes 4 & 5
Low velocity Rifle and
Pistol 75 102.5 100 1000
High velocity
Pistol/Carbine
150 215 215 1000
High velocity Rifle 200 215 215 1500
NOTES
1. Concrete: 20N/mm2 20mm aggregate suitably reinforced.
2. Brickwork: solid, void-free Engineering quality bricks.
Page 180 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3. Blockwork: solid, dense aggregate blocks with a minimum compressive
strength of 10 N/mm2 and a minimum density of 1500 kg/m3.
4. Earth embankment: To be suitably compacted stone-free soil incorporating
geo-textile reinforcement where appropriate.
5. The thickness: indicated refers to the crest, where there is no additional
protection or support behind. If a bank of greater thickness is faced with
stone-free earth, it may be possible to reduce this dimension depending on
anticipated ammunition usage and likely depth of penetration.
a. Positioning. The stop butt should be positioned as close to the target line
as practicable. As the distance from the target line to the crest increases,
the stop butt height and width requirement becomes greater to enable
capture of all predicted shot.
b. Protection. Where a vertical wall is used for high velocity rifle stop butt
construction, the area visible above the sand and within the canopy is
liable to receive strike fairly regularly; and additional protection shall be
provided to the front face. This is particularly important where the wall is
near the backsplash distance.
- Concrete. Where reinforced concrete is used, timber may be used
for anti-splash protection. Typically 50mm softwood timber planks
on 50mm thick battens is used. Great care is needed to avoid
creating potential areas of unseen structural damage, for example
bullets may produce only small holes and timber cladding can appear
undamaged on the surface, while severe unseen spalling occurs
behind. In such cases the cladding should be fixed so that it can be
easily and regularly removed to monitor vulnerable areas.
Page 181 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
- Brickwork. Where brickwork is used to create a stop butt no
additional ricochet protection is needed. However inside the canopy
above the sand or rubber a render coat, 1:4 mix 20mm thick, is
commonly applied. This shows strike immediately, alerting range
users to incorrect target positioning or other potential problem
areas, and eases maintenance by reducing damage to the brickwork
and enabling replacement of the render when necessary. Where
sand bullet catchers are used the render should be continued down
450mm behind the sand to prevent moisture seeping into the
brickwork.
4.5 COMMUNICATIONS
4.5.1 EXTERNAL
A means of summoning the emergency services is to be available. A land laid
telephone should be provided in areas where mobile communication signal strength
is suspect.
4.5.2 INTERNAL
On ranges with permanent accommodation, communication between firing points
and manned facilities should be provided.
Page 182 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
4.6 MAINTENANCE
4.6.1 RANGE PROFILE SURVEY
The effects of weathering and soil movement will cause changes in the range
profile. Periodic survey of the range is essential to ensure that the range geometry
remains within design limits. The frequency of check surveys is dependent upon the
natural foundation of the range its exposure and attrition; the requirement varies
from 5 - 10 years. New ranges are to be re-surveyed 2 - 3 years after construction.
4.6.2 RESPONSIBILITIES
Maintenance is the responsibility of the CFI. Responsibilities may be divided as
follows:
a. Range Staff. See HPRS Volume 1 Chapter 2, para 2.4.4 Muzzle Velocity
and Muzzle Energy Limitations
b. Property Management. (see Volume 1, Chapter 2, para 2.3.1 General)
- Grounds.
- Fencing and sign posting.
- Structures, roads and drainage including stability of slopes and erosion control.
- Water and electricity supplies.
- Periodic refurbishment of the range structure.
b. Equipment Management. Repairing and servicing equipment installed by single Police contract.
Page 183 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
4.6.3 FREQUENCY
Proper maintenance is dependent upon good liaison between the CFI, Range Safety
Inspectors and the ED supported by a properly scheduled maintenance programme.
A heavily used range may need one day's maintenance each week plus one or two
days' maintenance by the Range Staff each month. Two closed periods of a week or
so may be needed each year for building and earthworks repair; this work should
be combined with the contract repair of equipment.
4.6.4 BULLET CATCHER
The requirements for maintaining the bullet catcher sand and de-leading are given
in Chapter 2, paras 2.8.5 Maintenance and 2.9.3 Maintenance at Pages 99 and 105.
4.6.5 HIDDEN ATTRITION
Where anti backsplash or ricochet protection surfaces have been added to hard
defence structures, careful and regular inspection of the hard structure is required
to ensure that the defence structure is not deteriorating behind the soft cladding.
Such cladding must be readily moved to ease inspection.
4.7 COMPLIANCE CHECKS
The following compliance checks are detailed below
a. Authorised weapons, ammunition and practices (Range SOPs).
b. Firing point alignment, size, positioning and height.
c. Range floor and ricochet pit profile, if applicable.
Page 184 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
d. Mantlet height & profile.
e. Targets correctly sized, spaced and protected.
f. Target centre height and flank positions accurately identified.
g. Bullet catcher sizing and specification.
h. Canopy construction against `pop over', if applicable.
i. Stop butt wall height and width, if applicable.
j. Stop butt wall height, width, face angle and crest depth, if applicable.
k. Flags, signs and emergency communications.
Page 185 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 5: The Close Quarter Combat Range (Urban) – CQCR (u)
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The Close Quarter Combat Range (Urban) - CQCR (U) is a very sophisticated
training facility. It provides a specific form of training in which command and
control at all levels is developed in addition to shooting skills in the urban
environment. It is primarily intended to provide realistic exercise before operational
deployment in an urban area and relates to live fire ranges only.
5.1.1 AIM
This chapter sets out the design criteria and construction details for constructed
CQB (U) ranges and for tactical indoor ranges.
5.1.2 DESCRIPTION
The CQCR (U) is constructed to reflect typical urban environments with a variety of
realistic scenarios. Domestic and industrial areas, wide and narrow streets,
underground services, traffic and an impression of public activity. The range
provides the police staff under training with realistic operational situations in and
around public activity. The dimensions of target selection and fire discipline are
provided. There is no set layout for a CQCR (U). Facilities may be provided in
isolation for specific situation training or as a self contained complex or located
alongside existing range areas to incorporate sniper practices in an urban
environment.
Page 186 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
5.1.3 PURPOSE
This range provides tactical training in the engagement of targets at varied ranges
in an urban environment including Methods of Entry (MoE), and judgmental
shooting.
5.2 DANGER AREAS
5.2.1 TEMPLATES
A combination of WDA templates and of NDA principles are applied dependent upon
arcs of fire and range structures.
5.3 DESIGN
5.3.1 GENERAL CONCEPTS
CQCR (U) ranges generally reflect current or projected operational situations. They
may consist of a single structure or replicate an urban environment and they may
be permanent, semi permanent or temporary structures. The urban ops skills to be
practised in / on these ranges include:
a. Urban assault – breaching, Methods of Entry (MOE)
b. Close protection/VIP scenarios
c. House / room clearance.
d. Public Order scenarios.
e. Rifle/Sniper scenarios.
f. Operating within urban areas – collateral damage, judgmental shooting.
Page 187 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
5.3.2 PHYSICAL CONSIDERATIONS
Urban ranges should reflect current or predicted operational environments. Current
operations could involve one or more of the following situations:
a. Limited fields of fire (operating in narrow streets).
b. Limited observation (by-passing subjects).
c. Cover from fire and view (making use of urban layouts).
d. Open areas (exposed to subjects fire).
e. Industrial buildings (variety of layout).
f. Towers (sniper activity).
g. Religious structures (testing rules of engagement).
5.3.3 SITING
These ranges are best constructed on larger training areas with the layout
configured to permit firing within prescribed arcs. This also allows more realistic
exercise scenarios. Isolated facilities provide only limited training capability.
5.3.4 LAYOUT
A SA loading bay forms the start point of an exercise which also finishes at an
unloading bay. These bays are normally contained in an administrative building
which also provides preparation, briefing, de-kiting and video debriefing rooms. The
scenes simulate the features of potential operational areas. Facades of terraced
houses, shops, garages etc. form the periphery or outer boundary wall. Buildings
are laid out on internal roads with such features as gardens, squares and car parks
to produce the open spaces. Obstructions such as walls, fences, lamp posts and
parked cars are included. The layout will be dependent upon and be formulated
around a programme of incidents.
Page 188 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
5.3.5 SPECIAL EFFECTS
Various effects are available to add realism to the urban environment:
a. Lighting: Domestic and street lighting, and suspect vehicle headlights are
directed to silhouette police staff. Floodlighting may be used as a prelude to
an incident in darkened streets.
b. Motivations: Various mannequins throughout the range can be moved
remotely to attract attention.
c. Missiles: Half-bricks, simulated petrol bombs and the like may be released
in specifically designed areas.
d. Sound Effects: A background of sound effects can be simulated by
recordings; for example - urban activity, gunfire and increasing hostility.
e. Pyrotechnics: Examples of electrically initiated pyrotechnics are available
for use are:
- Groundburst: Simulates explosions.
- Multi-shot simulator: Simulates weapon fire.
Other simulators are available to police and can be used during training by
competent staff.
NOTE:
All the above effects should be remotely operated/activated by the target effects
operator in the control tower.
Page 189 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
5.3.6 DEFENCE STRUCTURE SIZES
Where there is a need to provide NDA criteria for open ranges the defence
structures are designed to meet the requirements set out in Chapter 4. For
proprietary NDA bullet catcher systems the minimum height is to be 2.4m covering
engagements up to 10m with Fig.11 targets at ground level or Fig.12 targets at not
more than 0.5m off ground level. For enclosed or semi enclosed facilities the
defence zone structure requirements used for engagements over 10m are 12
degrees (elevation and azimuth) from the line of sight to target as set out in
Chapter 2 Table 6 and illustrated in Chapter 3.
5.3.7 OVERHEAD GANTRIES
Where overhead gantries are provided these are used only to monitor dry run
through practices. During live fire activity they are not to be used. Where external
engagement is possible the gantries should be constructed with timber and not
steel unless the gantry is itself protected from bullet strike.
5.4 RANGE OPTIONS
5.4.1 OUTDOOR OPEN RANGE LIVE FIRE TACTICAL TRAINING AREAS (LFTTAS)
Permanent or temporary CQCR (U) ranges may be set up on LFTTAs. Permanent
ranges are to be formally established in accordance with HPRS Volume.1. All
structures are designed to meet the ballistic and protection standards set out in this
document. For this type of range the following considerations are taken into
account:
Page 190 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Range Danger Area (RDA): Where the Cone of Fire (C of F, see
Table 3: Authorised SA Cones of Fire to be Applied on Police Ranges on
Page 54) and predicted ricochet (see Table 1) is not captured an RDA
shall be provided.
a. Air Danger Height (ADH): Where the Cone of Fire is not captured,
an ADH is provided as set out in Table 1: ADH for SA ammunition on
Page 48.
b. Arcs of Fire: Where there is a limited area for applying RDA, clear
arcs of fire are provided. Arcs of fire are particularly important where
target designation is not tightly controlled. For example, targets
mounted on roofs or upper storey windows will generate High Elevation
Fire (HEF). RDA and ADH in these cases are taken from HEF tables and
the worst case RDA, ADH used.
c. Structures (Permanent or Temporary): Where structures or
façades are provided on LFTTAs there should be no hard surfaces that
might generate ricochet or backsplash. This includes unprotected
ironmongery, round head nails, brackets or other fittings or fixtures. All
surfaces within the C of F must be of a ballistic material or system.
Ballistic materials include any material that absorbs rounds or an
element made up of a hard surface protected by an anti backsplash
curtain or material. Consideration must be given to climatic conditions
where this may change the ballistic properties of the material such as
surface freezing in colder climates.
Page 191 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
5.4.2 OUTDOOR NO DANGER AREA (NDA) AND INDOOR CQCR (U) RANGE
Outdoor ranges should meet the Non Standard NDA criteria provided in Chapter 4.
Some outdoor NDA and all indoor CQCR (U) ranges take into account the emissions
detailed in Chapter 11.
5.5 CONSTRUCTION
(Permanent and semi permanent ranges)
5.5.1 MATERIALS
Structural elements may employ conventional building materials or specialist
ballistic materials in areas where targets are to be sited. Facades in areas of
expected engagement with small arms and grenades are constructed to absorb shot
and grenade fragments, and to eliminate ricochet and backsplash. Where rubber
components are used, consideration should be given to the risk of fire particulary
where pyrotecnics are used.
5.5.2 TARGETRY
Fixed Electric Targets (FET) and radio-controlled targetry may be installed to meet
exercise objectives. Moving targets are also possible. Both fall-when-hit and
retaliatory devices may be employed. All “hard” target mechanisms must be
protected from backsplash and ricochet with appropriate compliant material.
5.5.3 BALLISTIC WALL OPTIONS
In order to minimise cost, urban live fire ranges may use common building
materials in areas where shot is not expected. Celcon blocks are an effective option
Page 192 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
as they will absorb stray shot and grenade fragments without generating ricochet
or backsplash. They will not however take high attrition. In areas where shot is
expected the following wall or panel solutions that absorb shot without generating
ricochet or backsplash may be considered. In heavy use ranges or where
concentrated engagement is expected, bullet catchers in front of the structure walls
should be considered to extend the life of the more expensive wall solutions.
a. Sand or earth: Sand or earth used in gabion mesh containers or sandwiched
between timber may be used as an effective protection wall or backstop for NDA
solutions. Table 11 below provides an indication on the actual penetration depth
to be expected from a variety of ammunition. Penetration close to the surface of
such material will be much greater. Any defence structures using these solutions
should be constructed with a minimum of 900mm thickness that will allow for
some disruption within the structure and still capture rounds.
Page 193 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
TABLE 11: EXPECTED PENETRATION OF DAMP SAND AND EARTH FROM 5
ROUNDS AT A SINGLE POINT OF AIM.
Ser Ammunition
Type
Range / Angle
of fire
Penetration
(See Note 1)
1 5.56mm 25m / 900 425mm
2 9mm 25m / 900 365mm
3 4.6mm 25m / 900 195mm
4 7.62mm 25m / 900 480mm
5 8.6mm 25m / 900 540mm
NOTES:
1. Closer engagement is expected to generate greater penetration.
2. 900mm minimum, 1000mm standard depth of sand or earth to capture
small arms ammunition in permanent structure bullet traps.
b. SACON (US): A proprietary fibre reinforced concrete supplied in block or panel
form. It has a lead leaching inhibitor reducing the potential for lead leaching into
the ground. If lead is allowed to build up in this material it will eventually
develop a backsplash hazard. In panel form, panels can be rotated after
prolonged use away from target areas. In block form, areas of high use can be
cut out and replaced.
c. TARCON (Turkey): Similar to SACON without the lead leaching inhibitor. Less
expensive than SACON.
Page 194 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Photo 1 – TARCON interlocking panels.
d. SLABLCON (UK): The original supplier of this material no longer exists
however TAS (RE) have details of a similar concrete mix that is currently used
on the urban façade range.
e. SHREDDED RUBBER PANEL AND BLOCK SYSTEMS: A shredded compressed
dense rubber tile over armoured steel plate system is a common proprietary wall
system suitable for all natures up to 7.62mm. Rubber tiles bonded directly to
steel plate may present a maintenance problem if sited in areas where regular
shot is expected. Tiles provided with a gap between the steel and rubber tile are
suitable for judgmental bullet catchers but the gap extends the depth of wall
presenting safety issues on external corners. Target areas or predicted impact
areas where bonded panels are used may be protected with a 2nd layer of
blocks in front of the structure to capture most rounds fired and allowing block
rotation as the blocks become loaded with lead bullets.
Photo 2 – Durapanel and block internal & external engagement
Page 195 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
5.5.4 BULLET TRAP OPTIONS
Bullet traps may be used against ballistic walls to limit attrition of expensive
materials or form the structure wall itself. All bullet traps must be capable of taking
direct fire at close ranges without the need for constant maintenance. In some
cases hidden attrition must be considered.
a. Sand / Earth: Large footprint trap. Smaller footprint gabion or timber solutions
are not suitable due to attrition from concentrated fire. Traditional bullet traps
are covered in Chapter 2.
b. Granulated rubber: Vertical granulated rubber traps with 500mm depth of
granulate can take up to 7.62mm. Rounds are captured within the granulate.
Not suitable for small MPI target practices.
c. Lamella: Illustrated in Chapter 3. Large footprint trap. A very efficient and
clean trap system but suitable only for up to 9mm ammunition.
d. Snail: Another large footprint US proprietary trap. It will take all rounds up to
12.5mm.
e. Flat steel: (AR500 minimum specification when 5.56mm SS109 is used). Used
with an antisplash curtain offset 300mm or compressed shredded rubber tiles
fixed 50mm off the steel plate. A small footprint solution. Panels may be
constructed in isolation to provide flexibility in room layout.
f. Angle steel (Venetian blind): AR500 12mm steel panels fixed at 45° to
impact angle in steel frames. Bullets are deflected down to the bottom of the
trap. Panels are loose fitted enabling rotation up and down away from areas of
high attrition. Compressed shredded rubber tiles are used to retain ricochet and
Page 196 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
backsplash. An expensive but long lasting trap system taking all rounds up to
7.62mm. Panels may be constructed in isolation to provide flexibility in room
layout.
5.5.5 METHOD OF ENTRY (MOE) TECHNIQUES
Specially constructed doors and windows may be required to practice forced entry
techniques either on or adjacent to fixed ranges. To use realistic MoE it is often
better to provide isolated training structures away from the urban range.
Photo 3 – MoE isolated stands
5.5.6 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION AND PUBLIC ADDRESS INSTALLATION
CCTV is provided to ensure the safe operation of the range; it can also be used to
record exercises and for debriefing. Cameras are fitted with IR for night use. A
public address (PA) system may be provided to enable the RCO to control the
exercise.
5.5.7 RANGE CONTROL
A range control building may be sited to enable observation and to control exercise
activity. In range control provision should be made for the RCO/exercise controller,
Page 197 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
target and effects operators, and video recording operators. Controlled and
protected access to the range control and administrative buildings should be
provided.
5.5.8 ELECTRICITY AND WATER
Mains electricity and water supply are essential for a range of this type. The
provision of a fire fighting main should be considered.
5.5.9 ANCILLARY BUILDINGS
The range requires extensive repair and maintenance which makes a target store
and well equipped workshop essential. Consideration must also be given to the
number of waiting staff necessary for an efficient throughput on the range. Waiting
areas with adequate facilities will be required.
5.6 COMMUNICATIONS
5.6.1 EXTERNAL
A means of summoning the emergency services, ideally a land laid telephone, is to
be available.
5.6.2 INTERNAL
Provision should be made for the following communications:
a. RCO to exercising staff.
Page 198 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
b. RCO to safety supervisors.
c. An intercom for range management between RCO/targets effects operators and video recording operators.
5.7 MAINTENANCE
Th In order to maintain a safe facility these facilities require detailed knowledge of
how materials stand up to live fire to determine when rotation, replacement or
repair of ballistic elements is needed.
a. Ballistic Walls. In some cases bullet attrition will not be apparent on
the rubber surfaces whilst the steel or structure behind deteriorates from
bullet impact. Shot in areas where shot is not expected, or high volume shot
is seen in areas where only occasional shot is expected is to be reported to
the Range Officer.
b. Water ingress. During winter months any standing water within these
facilities will cause a slip hazard. All drains on open balconies exposed to the
weather are to be kept clear.
c. Services. Where services are provided within the facility there is a need to
inspect for bullet strike damage from direct fire or ricochet.
5.7.1 RESPONSIBILITIES
Responsibilities may be divided as follows:
a. Range Warden: See HPRS Volume 1 Chapter 2, para 2.4.4.
b. Property Management: General inspection with particular emphasis on:
Page 199 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
- All facades including supports and access points.
- Observation towers and other elevated structures.
- Electrical safety, alarm and warning systems.
- Fire escapes in indoor facilities.
c. Equipment Management: Repairing and servicing equipment
installed by single Police contract.
5.7.2 FREQUENCY
Proper maintenance is dependent upon good liaison between the CFI, Range Safety
Inspectors and the ED supported by a properly scheduled maintenance programme.
A heavily used range may need maintenance after each use plus one or two days
more detailed maintenance by the Range Warden each month. Two closed periods
of a week or so may be needed each year for structure rotation and repair.
Page 200 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 5 ANNEX A: Additional Details For CQB (U) Shoot Through LFTT Facilities
1. General
CQB (U) Shoot Through LFTT facilities are provided for Police forces to
practice their Close Quarter Combat (CQC) skills in a LFTT environment. The
facilities are a cost effective means of providing realistic and demanding
training to personnel involved in close contact. The facilities may be
permanent i.e. constructed and maintained by those with responsibility for
the range facility, or temporary i.e. erected by a user and removed after
use.
2. Aim
These principles outline the requirement; design and construction of CQB (U)
Shoot through LFTT facilities to ensure structure and layout do not
compromise safety.
3. Description
CQB (U) LFTT facilities replicate buildings that might be encountered on
operations. Each building will typically have one entrance and exit and may
have a number of windows. Each building will have a series of adjacent
rooms, all linked by corridors. There is no set layout for the building as they
can be constructed to present different scenarios such as factories or small
dwellings and even specific locations that may be encountered on
operations. Structure layout and target positions, including position of
judgemental/friendly targets that would not normally be engaged, are
limited only by the available arcs. The building may be constructed so that
more than one team can advance concurrently.
Page 201 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
4. Danger Area
The facilities provide no ballistic protection and a Range Danger Area (RDA)
trace is required to accommodate the Weapon Danger Area (WDA) template
in the same way as other conventional LFTT activities.
5. Safety Angle
Target siting and triangulation is fundamental in ensuring that the individual
weapon safety angle is not compromised. Communication between the RCO,
safety supervisors and the exercising personnel ensures a safe practice and
cannot be over-emphasised.
6. Design
The facility can have a number of adjoining rooms but are designed in such
a way that the rooms funnel the users in the desired direction. Whilst a room
may have several entrances only one is to be available for use to exercising
users at any one time. Other entrances should be firmly closed and not be
used by exercising personnel.
7. Construction
a. CQB (U) LFTT facilities are made of penetrable materials sometimes
Hessian screens are erected but more than likely the facility will be
made of sheet timber such as ply-wood. Whatever material is chosen it
is essential, because of the close nature of firing, that no ricochet
inducing material is used to support the structure. Metal pickets are to
be protected and nails, if used to build the facility, are completely sunk
or covered.
b. Trip hazards are to be kept to a minimum although obstacles may be
factored into the compound as part of the tactical scenario. However,
there must be no obstacles on the exits in case of fire, injury or any
other such emergency.
c. Walls may be strengthened to provide the ability to place ladders if
required.
Page 202 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
d. Targets, including judgemental/friendly targets, are to be entirely
penetrable and positioned in such a way that rounds pass through and
into the danger area. Elevated targets with target centre in excess of 90
mils will require the application of the detail in Fig.19-2 with QE max
150 – 1250 mils.
e. The structure is to be sufficiently robust to withstand inclement
weather. In particular the structure must be stable in strong winds.
8. Targetry
Targets are positioned so that firers entering the room engage targets within
the arc of fire. Further rooms will present targets in the same manner. Firing
is therefore always away from any supporting team members and is safe.
This principle also applies to judgemental targets that should not normally
be engaged. Permanent structures are to be handed over to units with no
targets present. Range planning staff are then responsible for the positioning
of targets so that all firing is within the arc of fire.
9. Record of the Facility
Permanent CQB (U) Shoot through LFTT facilities i.e. those constructed and
maintained by those with responsibility for the range facility, are to be
approved by the RAO and recorded on the range’s Form 1057.
Page 203 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 6: The 1908 Design Barrack Range
6.1 INTRODUCTION
The 30 yard Barrack Range with a ricochet pit, 6 ft (1.8 m) deep at the target line,
is one of two designs approved by War Office Instructions for The Care and
Construction of Rifle Ranges 1908. The 30yd firing point is no longer to be used.
The range has been converted to have four firing points at 25, 20, 15 and 10 m.
This is for reference only as all new barrack ranges are to be constructed in
accordance with new criteria. This chapter describes the 1908 design barrack
range.
6.1.1 DESCRIPTION
All these ranges should now have been metricated for use as a 25m range.
Specifications from the original design are described at section 6.2.1 on Page 204
and the police specific range is illustrated in Figure 6-1: 30 Yard Barrack Range
with Rocochet Pit on Page 214.
6.1.2 PURPOSE
This barrack range provides a local facility for limited firing practices up to 25 m. It
is suitable for carrying out the handgun qualification shoots, introduction to
shooting, remedial training, preliminary grouping and zeroing, and development
shooting.
Page 204 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
6.2 DESIGN
The design of this range has evolved over time and has proven since 1908 to
provide a safe environment in which to undertake shooting practices within a urban
area.
6.2.1 SPECIFICATIONS
The following specifications were added to the original design of this range:
CANOPY:
a. A canopy has been added to the bullet catcher to contain `pop-over'.
This is the tendency for the occasional 7.62 mm ball round to deform
and ricochet vertically out of the sand bullet catcher. The canopy roof is
to be constructed to prevent rounds passing through it. The 5mm steel
plate fixed to the underside of a timber canopy provides protection for
at least 1/2 the depth of sand and covering the full canopy width. Other
impenetrable material, such as concrete, is also suitable.
b. Where high velocity ammunition, of any calibre or nature, is to be used,
an anti-ricochet or `pop-over' canopy is required to prevent vertical
ricochet from the bullet catcher material leaving the range. The canopy
shall be positioned to cover the full width of the bullet catcher and at
least the rear half of the catcher as this is the area where vertical
ricochet is most likely. The canopy shall be impenetrable to ricochet
with typical construction being a timber roof with 5mm minimum thick
steel lining to the underside, brick built, bullet proof side and rear walls.
The bulletproof side walls are required on police ranges only, as the
requirement exists for cross lane shooting and tactical movement, the
result of which may cause ammunition to exit the BC sideways. This is
Page 205 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
not the case on military ranges hence the difference with 403 criteria.
Other materials may be considered acceptable. Where high velocity
ammunition is to be used without a canopy above the bullet catcher, a
100m radius limited danger area (LDA) is required to the sides and rear
of the range (measured from the flank target positions at the sides and
stop butt for extent of DA to the rear). In addition to the 100m LDA an
air danger height (ADH) of 500ft (5.56mm) or 750ft (7.620 is to be
implemented. An appropriate number of sentries will be required to
ensure the whole danger area remains clear during firing.
25 M FIRING POINT:
The range has been metricated with the addition of a 25 m firing point.
The depressed LofS is maintained.
6.2.2 BACK-TO-BACK RANGES
Some ranges were built back-to-back with the one stop butt wall. The wing walls
had to be straight and their length increased to 5.1 m. For simultaneous use,
canopies have been placed over the bullet catchers. A typical layout is shown in
Figure 6-2: Back-to-Back Barrack Ranges on Page 215.
6.2.3 SA LIMITATIONS
Limitations on the maximum number of SA, ammunition and rates of fire that can
be used on this range are given in the appropriate range SOPs. These limitations
give either an increased safety factor under difficult conditions or acknowledge that
the design only caters for some practices and for stable aimed firing.
Page 206 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
6.2.4 SHOT GUNS
The range design is suitable for shot guns firing solid slug or buck shot. Where
ranges have significant solid slug practices de-leading frequency may need to be
increased to avoid the build up of lead at the MPI.
6.2.5 MANTLETS
The mantlet at the head of the ricochet pit may be with, or without a stepped slope
of >30°.
6.3 CONSTRUCTION
6.3.1 STOP BUTT WALL
a. LAYOUT: The stop butt wall consists of a central section at 1600 mils
(90°) to the LofF and two wing walls arched forward at 2844 mils
(160°). The standard four lane range was designed with the central
section 7.4 m long. If additional firing lanes were required, this length
was increased by 1.8 m for each additional lane but the length of the
wing walls did not have to be increased.
b. MATERIALS: The stop butt wall was normally constructed of solid (void
free) Class B engineering brick with a minimum thickness of 225 mm or
with materials which gave a similar resistance to shot penetration.
Inspectors should ensure the brick used on these ranges do not permit
rounds to enter more than 10% of the back or wing wall structures.
Where penetration is clearly greater than 10% from one strike refer to NPIA.
Page 207 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
c. HEIGHT: A standard wall height of 7.865 m applied with a flat range
floor. The excavation of a ricochet pit enabled the height of the stop
butt wall to be reduced; the reduction was equal to the depth of the pit
but the wall height was not to be lower than 6.065 m.
d. COMPLIANCE: The above is only valid for ranges that comply in all
ballistic respects to the Standard Detail.
6.3.2 BULLET CATCHER
A sand or granulated rubber bullet catcher is built over the entire central section of
the stop butt wall. Its height is maintained at 2.3 m from the top of the target
trench.
6.3.3 CANOPY
The canopy mentioned at section 6.2.1 on Page 204 should be added to all 25m
barrack ranges. Otherwise a LDA is required in order to fire high velocity
ammunition. The LDA has to extend laterally 100 m from each flank target, striking
an arc to a line 100 m behind the stop butt in order to capture predicted pop-over.
Without a canopy the range is classed as LDA therefore depending on the calibre of
ammunition fired an appropriately sized Air Danger Area is also to be implemented
(see Chapter 2, Page 48, Table 1). The facing edges of the canopy wing walls are to
be protected with timber to prevent backsplash.
Page 208 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
6.3.4 TARGETS
The range may be used with all Police figure and screen targets. It is essential to
the safety of this range that the target centre design height is maintained.
6.3.5 TURNING TARGET MECHANISMS
The cable pull turning target mechanism originally provided on these ranges is
difficult to operate and maintain. Two alternatives are available:
a. CAPSTAN OPERATED: See Chapter 10.
b. ELECTRICALLY OPERATED: These are described in Chapter 10. They may be
permanently fitted and operated through a transformer to reduce mains
electricity to 12 volts. Portable mechanisms require 12 volt batteries.
Electrically or signal, rather than capstan, operated is the system of choice as
it is cheaper to buy and to install. Its speed and simplicity of operation
improve the training value of the range.
6.3.6 TARGET POSITIONS
The number of targets per lane may be varied to meet training objectives but
spacing should be:
a. 1.65 m minimum from the inside edge of the bullet catcher to the flank target
centres.
b. 0.600 m minimum between target centres lane to lane.
Page 209 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
c. Targets in each lane should be at least 375mm apart.
d. Target centre height on this range is fixed at 875mm (C).
NOTE: Other layouts may be adopted for pistol practices but sub-paragraph a.
above remains the minimum.
6.4 RANGE FLOOR
6.4.1 RICOCHET PIT
The excavation of a 1.8 m ricochet pit allowed the height of the stop butt wall to be
reduced. This was justified by the effect which the pit has, in:
a. Reducing the number of ricochets from ground strike.
b. Reducing the angle of strike and thus lowering the angle of ricochet.
c. Moving the point of strike further down-range to help ricochet containment.
6.4.2 CONFIGURATION
The range floor is surfaced with a minimum of 150 mm of soil free from large
stones (> 30 mm in any dimension). It has to be firm, free draining and should be
bound with grass or similar ground cover which is kept cut short. Any paths
constructed are to be of non ricochet inducing material.
Page 210 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
6.4.3 SIDE WALLS AND BANKS
The range was designed to safely contain all acceptable aimer deviation and
ricochet. It therefore follows that, with proper range discipline and preparatory
training, no hazard is predicted beyond the range floor. However, if it is necessary
to increase the confidence of people adjacent to the range, a solid or screen wall
may be provided. Earth banks may be used to screen a range provided the toe of
the bank is beyond the range floor; otherwise a round striking its sloped surface
may leave the range.
6.4.4 FENCES AND SIGNS
All access to the range when in use must be controlled. Ranges that are in open
access areas, particularly those where woods or shrubs come close to the stop butt
or side of the range should be fenced and signed to ensure access during firing is
controlled. The same measures will be necessary where ranges with sloping earth
bunds protect the sides of the range. Local risk assessments will identify areas
where access will need to be controlled. Where fences are deemed to be necessary
prohibition signs will also be required. A flag pole for a red range in use flag is
provided where it can best be seen. If night firing is to be conducted, a red light is
fitted to the flag pole. If the flag pole is on the stop butt wall, it is to be made of
non-ricochet inducing material.
Page 211 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
6.5 FIRING POINTS
6.5.1 25 M FIRING POINTS
The 25 m firing point is raised to 450 mm above ground level at the target line so
as to ensure a depressed LofS from the prone position. It should also have a low
maintenance surface that encourages the firer to take up a comfortable fire
position.
6.5.2 OTHER FIRING POINTS
The 20, 15 and 10 m firing points are only for weapons fired from the standing or
kneeling posture. These firing points are not normally specially surfaced.
6.5.3 DISTANCE AND LANE MARKERS
Timber markers should be suitably positioned to show firing distances and lane
numbers on the firing points.
6.6 LIGHTING
The range may be provided with lighting for night practices but it was not designed
for low light or LNV shooting. Where required the range is to be suitably illuminated
to permit adequate visibility.
6.7 COMMUNICATIONS
A means of summoning the emergency services, ideally a land laid telephone, is to
be available.
Page 212 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
6.8 MAINTENANCE
It is essential to the safety of the range that the ricochet pit is maintained to its
correct profile, depth and width. The bank which forms a mantlet at the end of the
pit must be maintained at 600 mils (34°). The pit should be well drained but a
shallow collection of water at the very bottom of the pit is often unavoidable.
However, a build-up of sediment in the drainage area must be avoided as it will
eventually reduce the depth of the pit.
a. RANGE STAFF See HPRS Volume 1 Chapter 2,para 2.4.4 Muzzle Velocity and Muzzle Energy Limitations - Property Management. General inspection with particular emphasis
on:
- Stop butt, canopy and wing walls.
- Fire trenches.
b. FENCES AND SIGN POSTS (See Chapter 2).
c. EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT: Repairing and servicing equipment
installed by single Police contract.
6.8.1 FREQUENCY
Proper maintenance is dependent upon good liaison between the CFI, Range Safety
Inspectors and the ED supported by a properly scheduled maintenance programme.
A heavily used range may need one day's maintenance each week plus one or two
days' maintenance by the Range Staff each month. Two closed periods of a week or
so may be needed each year for building and earthworks repair; this work should
be combined with the contract repair of equipment.
Page 213 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
6.8.2 STOP BUTT WALL
Bullet strike on the stop butt wall above or beside the bullet catcher is to be
recorded in the Range Log Form 906. If such incidents occur frequently, the range
configuration may need to be checked by NPIA. Where strike occurs shot marks
should be made good and to ease inspection, the wall should be painted with an
external sand or white paint. The bullet catcher back wall above the sand should
be covered with a weak render mix of 1:4 Cement / sand to ease repairs.
6.8.3 BULLET CATCHER
The requirements for maintaining the bullet catcher are given in Chapter 2.
Page 214 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 6-1: 30 YARD BARRACK RANGE WITH RICOCHET PIT
Page 215 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 6-2: BACK-TO-BACK BARRACK RANGES
Page 216 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 7: Tube Ranges
7.1 INTRODUCTION
The tube or pipe range was originally known as an improvised range that was
developed for use with low velocity SA and later for high velocity SA. The concept is
a truly NDA range that suits those who need to minimise external noise levels.
The aim of this chapter is to describe the design and construction of the tube range.
7.2 Description
These ranges are usually constructed using pre-cast concrete units, although any
suitable tube or box section that will contain shot may be used. There is a firing bay
at one end and may have intermediate firing/target distances. At the target end the
target house contains the bullet catcher and targets. The range may be surface
laid, half or fully buried. It is covered with top soil to enhance the ballistic safety
and is normally covered with turf for aesthetic reasons. In some cases the firing
point and target area are not fully enclosed. This range may be used for high
velocity and low velocity weapons limited only by the ballistic criteria for
backsplash, ricochet and penetration detailed in Chapter 2. Only one firer can use a
tube however there may be multiple tubes allowing several firers to use the range
simultaneously provided the minimum firing point widths given in Table 12 on page
224 are adhered to.
Page 217 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
7.3 Purpose
This range provides a local facility for limited firing practices and the range may be
suitable (dependent upon the diameter of the tube) for carrying out the handgun
qualification shoots, introduction to shooting, remedial training, preliminary
grouping and zeroing, and developmental shooting.
7.4 DESIGN
7.4.1 DESIGN CRITERIA
Illustrations of a typical range are shown in Figure 7-1: Typical High Velocity Tube
Range Layout on page 233 for a high velocity range. Figure 7-2: Tube Range
Criteria on page 234 shows the application of bullet catcher and defence zone
criteria, which applies to high velocity ranges. Considerable variation in the design
is possible, with consultation from TAS (RE). The principle of this range is that the
tube will fully contain the shot fired in it. Whilst it is a simple matter to arrange the
weapon to be within the tube, the safe capture of the shot and ricochet poses the
biggest design problem. Environmental issues such as lead dust, unburnt propellant
carbon monoxide and noise must also be considered where firing points and target
house is enclosed. Refer to Chapter 11 for details of the hazards associated with
enclosed ranges. Essential in the construction of new ranges is an internal finish
specification that minimises the build up of dust. In existing firing rooms and bullet
catchers all non-essential dust collecting surfaces should be removed or sealed to
prevent dust accumulating out of sight. Consideration should be given to providing
an open or semi enclosed firing point that will minimise the environmental issues.
Page 218 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
7.4.2 SITING
It requires a flat and level site on firm, well drained land. The external
considerations are lead dust from the extract filter, noise and aesthetics.
7.5 CONSTRUCTION - TARGET HOUSE
7.5.1 BULLET CATCHERS
The bullet catcher is sized to capture all direct shot, as shown in Figure 7-2: Tube
Range Criteria on page 234. The type of bullet catcher selected will depend
principally upon the SA to be fired. These are:
a. Low velocity Pistol/Carbine (1) Flat Steel Plate with Anti-Splash Curtain. This is the simplest
and cheapest form of bullet catcher. It does however create a
lot of lead contamination in the target area and the anti-splash
curtain requires maintenance. The steel plate is bolted back to
a solid wall with a material sandwich between to reduce both
impact and transmitted noise (see Chapter 3). The thickness
of steel is determined from Chapter 2 Table 7a (page 92).
Size will be dependent upon the distance from the end of
the tube.
(2) Angled Steel Plate with Anti-Splash Curtain. Although this
design is often selected by range builders, it offers no
advantage over the flat steel plate and is often more noisy.
With both this and the flat steel plate, a sacrificial plate at the
MPI will extend the life of the bullet catcher. However, for the
Page 219 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
angled steel plate care will be required not to expose its
leading edges to the LofF
(3) Alternative Bullet Traps. There are many designs
commercially available but most have safety shortcomings.
Two bullet traps described below for High velocity Rifle are also
suitable for low velocity weapons, pistol and carbine, though they
will be more expensive that the traps above. These are the Snail
Bullet Trap and the Granulated Rubber Trap.
b. High velocity Rifle/Carbine and Automatic Fire
(1) Sand Bullet Catcher. Sand bullet catchers are not
recommended indoors due to the dust hazard from the sand.
For ranges where the bullet trap is not enclosed the traditional
sand bullet catcher with canopy protection or limited danger
area is acceptable.
(2) Angled Steel Plate with Anti-Splash Curtain. This bullet catcher
has been used on simple, low cost high velocity tube ranges
but it may only be used for firing single shot. High maintenance
costs make this design a poor choice on a high velocity range
which is to be heavily used. A full specification for steel is
provided in Chapter 2, page 92.
(3) Snail Bullet Trap. This bullet decelerator, patented by the
Savage Arms Corporation of the USA, reduces lead pollution
problems at the target end of the range, can be used for
automatic fire and it can be produced to accept the 0.5 in
round. It must however be individually designed for each
Page 220 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
range by the supplier to ensure that safety criteria are met.
This type of trap is unsuitable for steel or steel tipped rounds.
Snail traps cannot be locally manufactured due to precise
impact surface design.
(4) Granulated Rubber Trap. The granulated rubber trap used at a
natural angle of repose potentially is a very cost effective and
environmentally friendly solution. Details of this trap are
provided in Chapter 2 and it is illustrated at Figure 3-6: Typical
Indoor Range Bullet Trap Detail (High or Low Velocity
Ammunition) on Page 166.
7.5.2 DEFENCE ZONE
The defence zone is intended to be impenetrable to shot and is to contain ricochet
beyond the bullet catcher. It is sized as shown in Figure 7-2: Tube Range Criteria
on Page 234. Any portion of the target house within the defence zone is to have a
minimum construction as detailed in Table 7a: Steel Protective Plating for Ranges
on Page 92 or be over-plated with steel as also specified in Table 7a: Steel
Protective Plating for Ranges on Page 92.
7.5.3 TARGETRY SELECTION
When selecting targets and target mechanisms, the difficulty of moving down the
range to mark or change targets should be borne in mind if target retrieval systems
are not installed in the tube. An automatic marking system and a simple turning
target mechanism will greatly enhance the range and the training value. Fall-when-
hit systems are difficult on a tube range as the concentration of the sound energy
in the tube may activate the mechanism without the target being struck.
Representative targets, sized to give the appearance of targets at greater ranges
Page 221 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
(see Chapter 10) provide valuable training on shorter ranges. To minimise the risk
of ricochet off the tube walls, targets should be presented centrally in the tube.
7.5.4 RICOCHET AND BACKSPLASH
There should be nothing within the backsplash zone (see Table 2, Chapter 2, page
50) that could cause ricochet or backsplash. Any services, ducts or parts of the
target mechanism that can be struck are to be protected. Should falling plate or
other impenetrable target be used the distance from the target to the firing point
must be greater than the hard target backsplash distance (see column c, Table 2,
Chapter 2) and the effects of subsequent ricochet on services and fittings in the
target house must be considered.
7.5.5 TARGET ILLUMINATION
Target illumination is ideally achieved with a single 5 ft fluorescent strip light per
target which may be mounted above or below the target or to the sides between
each tube. Reflector lamps (tungsten) of 100 watt per target may be used if
dimming is required for low light level shooting.
7.5.6 SIZE
The diameter (dia) of the tube should be selected to suit the targetry and practices.
The size selected must allow a clear view of the whole target but is not to be less
than:
a. Ranges up to 25 m: 900 mm dia to allow for access. For existing
ranges tubes of less than 900 mm dia, special provision for
cleaning will be required.
Page 222 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
b. Ranges greater than 25 m: 1800 mm dia is desirable but the
minimum size is 1200 mm, which is also the minimum size to
accommodate the full sized target.
7.5.7 LAYING
A reinforced concrete pipe with a wall thickness of not less than 75 mm, of the type
typically used for drainage works, is normally selected to form the firing tube.
Particular attention shall be paid to the bedding of tube sections to ensure future
settlement or movement is eliminated as any such settlement will render the range
unsafe. The tube must be laid straight to line and level. The laying tolerance is plus
or minus 50 mm over a 100 m length. No edges or lips may occur which would
cause backsplash if struck and any of 3 mm or more facing the firer must be
ground off and feathered out. To avoid problems with settlement of the sectional
tube components a flexible continuous liner may be inserted into the tube. The tube
may be completely or partially below ground or may be laid at ground level and
banked over. The tube should support its own dead loads and all the loads imposed
upon it. Tubes without a liner should:
a. Support its own dead load and all loads imposed upon it.
b. Be bedded and supported to eliminate any subsequent settlement that will generate backsplash hazards from misaligned joints.
c. Have the socket end of the pipe facing the firer.
d. Have all joints sealed watertight and the tube coated with a waterproof membrane.
7.5.8 EARTH COVER
Earth cover to the tube will vary depending on the type of tube range. An additional
allowance has to be made for landscaping such that over the seasons soil erosion
and ground maintenance works will not reduce the compacted earth cover to less
Page 223 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
than a minimum of 500 mm for high velocity rifle ranges but for low velocity tube
ranges no earth cover is required for ballistic purposes.
7.5.9 LIGHTING
Some form of lighting may be required according to the length of the tube.
7.5.10 WEAPON MUZZLE LIMIT
At each firing point a line should be painted 150 mm (C) inside the tube to denote
the point to which the muzzle should be inserted before engaging the target. This
will preclude any chance of rounds striking the leading edge of the tube.
7.6 CONSTRUCTION - FIRING BAY
7.6.1 FIRING POINTS
Firing points should be constructed as per Chapter 3, ideally with the height such
that the weapon is positioned centrally in the tube for all firing postures, although
this is less important in large diameter tubes, i.e: over 1200 mm. To cater for all
three postures, platforms at two or three different levels may be required. Small
diameter tubes are best limited to the prone position or prone and standing in a
trench. The firing point widths given in Table 12 of this chapter (page 224) are the
minimum widths required and take into account:
a. Practices to be fired.
b. The space required for coaching.
c. Disturbance caused by adjacent weapon noise.
d. The hazard caused by ejected cartridge cases.
Page 224 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
7.6.2 SCREENS
Screens between firers can be used to reduce firing point width. The screen should
be designed to reduce both noise transmission to adjacent firing points and
reflected noise (reverberation). Screens must not be so deep that they restrict the
RCO's view of the firers. The following table is a guide to firing point widths on a
multi-firing point range.
TABLE 12: MINIMUM FIRING POINT WIDTHS
Width of Each Firing Point (m) Minimum Firing Point Width
With Screens Without Screens
(a) (b) (c)
Pistol/LV Carbine HV Rifle/Carbine Automatic Fire
1 1.8 2.5
1.8 1.8 2.5
7.6.3 FLOOR FINISH
The floor finish on the firing point must be smooth and impervious to facilitate the
removal of lead dust and traces of unburnt propellant. A sealed, non-slip surface of
rubber or PVC may be provided with a cushioned backing. Porous materials such as
mats and sand bags, which can harbour lead or unburnt propellant, are not to be
used in the range. A hard smooth floor will reduce ricochet potential.
7.6.4 PISTOL FIRING POINTS
Particular care is required in the design of pistol firing points. It is possible for an
unintentional shot to be fired at about 45° (800 mils) to the LofS and even
withdrawn from the tube. Surfaces which capture or direct the round without
ricochet or backsplash are essential.
Page 225 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
7.6.5 INTERMEDIATE FIRING DISTANCES
Two options are possible to provide short firing distances for pistol practices on
longer ranges:
a. Large Diameter Tubes. If the tube diameter or section is 1750
mm or larger, intermediate target positions can be provided
within the tube which are engaged from the main firing point. The
bottom of the tube can be levelled with a soft bitumen macadam
so that firers can move down the tube to mark and change
targets. Target mechanisms and edges within the tube are to be
protected against backsplash (see para 7.5.3).
b. Small Diameter Tubes. Tubes of less than 1750mm in diameter or
section are regarded as too small for firers to walk down. Pistol
firing points in this case are provided in firing rooms forward of
the main firing point. The design must ensure that the RCO can
maintain effective control. This is an expensive option as added
requirements are:
(1) Ventilation and noise attenuation in two locations.
(2) Anti-ricochet and backsplash protection around the
intermediate firing point.
(3) Safety interlock and warning systems to ensure that more
than one firing points cannot be entered at the same
time.
Page 226 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
7.6.6 FIRING POINT CHAMBER
The firing point chamber is to provide sufficient circulation space for firing details to
change safely. On ranges with three or more firing points, separate entry and exit
doors should give access to an assembly room behind. A walkway is needed behind
the firing points for the RCO and space should be provided on large ranges for an
instructor to assist the RCO. Open or partially enclosed firing rooms will reduce the
impact of weapon emissions and noise but it makes it difficult to control air flow in
the tubes.
7.6.7 LIGHTING
Lighting levels are to be such that when exposed, the targets are clearly visible to
the firers.
7.6.8 CONTROL, WAITING AND ASSEMBLY ROOMS
If AMS and turning targets are installed, a control room may be positioned behind
the RCO's walkway. It should be a glazed sound-proofed booth. The waiting detail
and assembly room are also to be isolated from the firing point noise and be
provided with a glazed viewing panel.
7.7 SAFETY MEASURES
7.7.1 ACCESS
As the RCO is unable to observe outside the range, facilities are required to prevent
access to the range when it is in use, and to activate audio-visual warnings and
safety interlocks.
Page 227 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
7.7.2 ENTRANCES
a. Main. A red lamp or sign is placed in a prominent position to warn
that the range is in use.
b. Other. Doors that can be opened to the target house or to
intermediate firing chambers is to cause target lights to be
extinguished and to activate an audio-visual alarm in the main
firing chamber. Provision is to be made to allow the RCO to reset
the audio-visual alarm within the firing room. The alarm system is
to have a device that indicates the alarm is correctly reset and is
`live'. Where all down range doors are fully secured by the RCO
such measures are not required.
7.7.3 SHIELDS
A safety shield is to be provided at the opening of the tube behind each
intermediate firing chamber so that it can be raised to block off the tube behind it.
7.7.4 NOISE
All new tube ranges should include noise control measures specifically designed for
the range. Full details are given in Chapter 2. However, the following are pertinent
to a tube range:
a. Noise Containment. This is effectively achieved by burying the
tube under earth. If the target house and firing rooms are not
buried, additional measures may be necessary (see Chapter 2).
b. Noise Attenuation. Noise in the tube can be severe if it is not
effectively controlled. Careful thought is required to cover the
Page 228 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
tube's curved surfaces to provide the maximum reverberation
time (RT), which should not exceed 0.5 sec at 500 and 1000
Hertz (Hz).
7.7.5 VENTILATION
The requirements for ventilation in indoor ranges are given in Chapter 11.
7.7.6 FIRE HAZARD
When specifying materials used in range construction, their fire rating must be
considered. Materials such as rubber compounds and timber can present a fire
hazard. This, combined with factors such as heat from target lighting and the
presence of unburnt propellant, require that careful consideration is given at the
design stage to fire prevention. Means of escape should conform fully to the
regulations.
7.7.7 FIRE APPROVAL
Attention is drawn to the Building Regulations 2000, Approved Document B1. The
advice and approval of the Force Fire Officer is mandatory on all new or
reconstructed indoor ranges.
7.7.8 EYE PROTECTION
In small tubes where there are rough joints in the tube walls or other backsplash
obstructions in the tube eye protection is to be worn by all firers.
Page 229 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
7.8 COMMUNICATIONS
7.8.1 EXTERNAL
A means of summoning the emergency services, ideally a land laid telephone, is to
be available.
7.8.2 INTERNAL
A means of communication between the RCO and the waiting detail in the assembly
room should be provided. On larger ranges and when there is a separate control
room, a full Public Address (PA) system should be considered.
7.9 SAFETY SIGNS
7.9.1 SAFETY SIGNS
The risk assessment for the range will determine what safety signs are required.
Details of the signs are illustrated in Chapter 2. However in all cases the following
signs should be provided:
a. No Smoking.
b. No food or drink in the range.
c. Keep out when range is in use.
d. Hearing protection to be worn when firing.
e. Eye Protection to be worn (at all times when firing)
Page 230 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
7.10 MAINTENANCE
7.10.1 GENERAL
Regular cleaning is essential to ensure that lead dust and unburnt propellant do not
build up in the range. Cleaning requirements are given in Chapter 11. The target
line must be kept clear of target debris. In some smaller ranges the target house
may need to be considered a confined space and the appropriate control measures
should be applied when accessing for maintenance. Advice from local ED should be
sought.
7.10.2 BULLET CATCHERS
a. Steel Plate Bullet Catchers with Anti-Splash Curtain. It is essential
that this type of bullet catcher is regularly de-leaded. The anti-
splash curtain is to be inspected before firing begins to ensure
that it is not holed. To prevent holing, the curtain should be
rotated regularly to ensure that the MPI location is moved. Holes
can be repaired by patching with pieces of salvaged curtain using
a suitable adhesive. There must be no more than two layers of
anti-splash curtain at any point in the line of fire.
b. Sand Bullet Catchers. See Chapter 2. In addition the sand is to be
kept moist to stop dust getting into the range.
c. Snail Bullet Trap. It is necessary to keep the reservoir of the Snail
Bullet Trap topped up with lubricating fluid and to ensure that the
pump is running before firing starts. Spent rounds in the
collection baskets must be emptied periodically.
Page 231 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
d. Granulated Rubber Trap. This trap requires little maintenance.
The MPI should be prodded regularly to check for accumulation of
rounds and to assist in round migration though the granulate. De-
leading should be as detailed in Chapter 2.
7.10.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
Maintenance is the responsibility of the RAU. Responsibilities may be divided as
follows:
a. Range Staff. See HPRS Volume 1 Chapter 2, para 2.4.4, page 70.
b. Property Management. General inspection with particular emphasis on: (1) The back wall especially the defence zone area.
(2) Tube alignment.
(3) Access security systems.
(4) The ventilation system (if fitted).
c. Equipment Management. Repairing and servicing equipment
installed by single Police contract.
7.10.4 FREQUENCY
Proper maintenance is dependent upon good liaison between the CFI, Range Safety
Inspectors and the ED supported by a properly scheduled maintenance programme.
A heavily used range may need one day or more maintenance each week plus one
or two day’s maintenance by the Range Staff each month. For frequency of de
leading ranges refer to Chapter 11, deep cleaning. Other trap systems may differ in
frequency of maintenance and de-leading. For deep cleaning refer to Chapter 11.
Page 232 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
7.11 COMPLIANCE CHECKS
7.11.1 THE FOLLOWING SHOULD BE CHECKED
a. Authorised weapons, ammunition and practices (Range SOPs).
b. Target House - Type of bullet catcher, bullet catcher sizing, defence zone sizing and structure, target material and fixing method, target centre height.
c. Tube diameter, wall thickness, material, tolerance and cover.
d. Any protrusion in the tube greater than 3mm that might generate
backsplash.
e. Firing Bay - Firing point height, width and spacing and intermediate firing distances, if applicable.
f. Signage and lighting.
g. Noise control measures.
h. Ventilation arrangements.
Page 233 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 7-1: TYPICAL HIGH VELOCITY TUBE RANGE LAYOUT
Page 234 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 7-2: TUBE RANGE CRITERIA
Page 235 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 8: The Gallery Range Imperial & Metric
8.1 INTRODUCTION
A Gallery Range (GR) is an open LDA range originally constructed to imperial
dimensions in yards (yds) or subsequently converted or partially converted to
metres (m) with firing points at 100m intervals normally up to 600m. On some
ranges the 100m to 400m firing points only are converted to metric. For ease of
reference firing points will be referred to as 100m, 200m etc with no suffix. This
range has a markers' gallery and a stop butt. The common range layout has 12
firing lanes each 4m wide. Targets are manually operated by the markers in the
butts.
8.2 Aim
This chapter describes the design and construction of GR.
8.3 Purpose
A GR is suitable for practices using rifle, carbine and pistol. Tracer ammunition
may also be used under the conditions set out in section 8.4.3 SA Tracer
Ammunition on Page 237. Due to the revised pistol template, all pistol practices on
GR or Gallery Type ranges should be confirmed by TAS (RE).
Page 236 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.4 DANGER AREAS
8.4.1 DA CATEGORIES
Five DA that may be applied to a GR
a. Gallery Range Danger Area Template. The template shown in
Figure 8-1 is applied to GR that conform to the requirements of
this chapter. There is a limiting QEmax of 70 mils (3.94°) for
imperial GR as the design allows some rounds to pass over the
stop butt. Where the QEmax is limited to 70 mils, rounds will fall
inside the RDA. A QEmax of 70mils equates to a QEtch of 30mils
(1.69°). It is the QEtch that can be measured on site.
b. Weapon Danger Area Template. The template shown in Figure 8-
1A, in accordance with the CofF for fixed ranges (see Chapter 2
Table 3), is used when the stop butt and mantlet design criteria
cannot be met, or hard ricochet inducing surfaces exist, and for
falling plate practices which do not conform to the standards set
out in this document.
c. Combined Gallery Danger Area Trace. The templates at sub
paragraphs a and b above may be combined to overcome
shortfalls in achieving the full GR criteria (see section 8.4.2
Combined Gallery DA Trace on Page 237).
d. Hill Background Criteria. The RDA may be reduced when there is
a hill or cliff behind the range. The conditions required to meet hill
background criteria are explained in Chapter 2
Page 237 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
e. Specialist Practices. Police Sniper practices may be permitted on
the GR or CGR with standard GR RDA or 2900m combined RDA
using .338 (8.6mm) ammunition providing the control measures
are implemented. These measures are designed to eliminate
ground ricochet and ensure that all shot is captured by the stop
butt. Refer also to
f. Table 4: SA Ammunition Maximum MV and ME Limitations (C) on
Page 71.
8.4.2 COMBINED GALLERY DA TRACE
When the full stop butt specification cannot be met or the range floor conditions are
such that Gallery criteria cannot be maintained, a combination of RDA and WDA
templates might provide a solution. The trace is produced after detailed survey of
the range and its geometry matched by TAS (RE) to the requirements of approved
RDA and WDA templates
8.4.3 SA TRACER AMMUNITION
Where tracer ammunition is used there is a requirement to extend the RDA 400 m
to the right flank around and behind the stop butt, 300 m to the left flank and
backsplash up to 125m back from the stop butt. For 7.62 mm tracer the ADH
increases to 1500 ft. The enhanced Gallery RDA template shown in RED at Figure
8-1 must fall within the overall range DA. Tracer is not to be fired from the 100
firing point unless the stop butt is 25m or more beyond the target line. The gallery
is not to be used when tracer is fired unless additional protection such as timber
boarding is provided between the stop butt and gallery.
Page 238 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.4.4 OTHER FACTORS
a. Burst Fire. The rules for burst fire are given in the relevant range
SOPs.
b. Moving Targets. The use of moving targets on a LDA (GR) type
range is normally restricted to one 2.4m run at the centre of a 12
lane range. Advice from TAS (RE) should be sought if targets for
more than one firer are required
c. LNV Shooting. If the GR has a 1830 m RDA, the engagement of
targets at the LNV is to be conducted with targets mounted on
the range floor immediately in front of the mantlet. To allow firing
in all postures, target centres must not exceed 1.5m off the range
floor. No engagement closer than 25m from the mantlet nor
further than 75m from the targets. Engagement beyond 75m
must take place from the 100 firing point at Gallery or FET
mounted targets. Range SOPs will state where targets may be
placed.
d. 200 Mil Rule. This reduction from the GR RDA is authorised only
between a split of two standard GR / CGR or ET(LDA)R. On these
ranges ground ricochet is limited by elevating the targets on top
of a mantlet. With reduced ground ricochet a reduction in the
flank safety angle (the 200mil Rule) may be applied. The 200 mil
rule is not to be applied when ranges are used by non Police
organisations.
e. Rifle Practices. Service Rifle practices using .338” (8.6 mm)
ammunition may be permitted on the a GR or CGR with a stop
Page 239 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
butt extending at least 1.5 m above the top of the target from the
prone position at 100 m.
8.4.5 PISTOL AND SHOTGUN PRACTICES ON A GR
The accepted location for targets engaged on standard GR pistol practices, from
firing positions between the gallery and the stop butt, is at the bottom of the stop
butt. On ranges where there is insufficient room between the gallery and the stop
butt for pistol practices, targets mounted in front of the mantlet may be engaged.
In such cases where the gallery detail between the stop butt and gallery is non
standard, advice from TAS (RE) should be sought to ensure the pistol template is
contained within the gallery RDA. In all cases the pistol 135mils template is to be
applied to ensure flank firing position templates are contained within the range
RDA.
Shotgun (slug and buckshot) may be fired at targets in lane mounted on the range
floor in front of the mantlet. Flank lanes are not to be used. No engagement of the
target closer than 25m. Ranges with dense rubber tiles fitted on the mantlet are
also suitable for shotgun practices.
8.5 DESIGN
8.5.1 PRINCIPLES
The GR design is based on principles that have evolved since about 1909. Current
design of the stop butt is based on firing from the 100 firing point on the basis that
weapons are zeroed from this distance and minimum grouping is achieved before
firers move back to the other firing positions. Specific information is provided
below:
Page 240 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
a. Target Height. Targets are placed above the mantlet so that the
CofF is raised above the range floor and thereby reduces the
incidence of ground ricochet. Some ricochet is inevitable but it will
be either stopped by the mantlet or stop butt, or contained within
the RDA. To ensure that on existing imperial ranges the
occasional shot passing over the stop butt will fall within the RDA,
it is necessary to apply a restriction as described in Section 8.4.1
DA Categories on Page 236.
b. Stop Butt Height. The height of the stop butt is based on criteria
applied from the 100 firing point only for the following reasons:
(1) The QE to the maximum target centre height being
greater from the 100 firing point than from further distant
firing points.
(2) The greater deviation of weapons being zeroed at the 100
firing point.
c. Stop Butt Profile. The slope of the stop butt face reduces the
probability of ricochet from shot fired at the target centre from
the 100 firing point. The angle of impact increases from the firing
points at greater ranges.
d. Quadrant Elevation. (QE) To ensure that on existing imperial
ranges and CGR the occasional shot passing over the stop butt
will fall within the RDA, it is necessary to apply a restriction as
described in section 8.4.1 DA Categories on Page 236. QEtch is
measured by assessing QE to maximum target centre and adding
the respective CofF. Where ranges are found to have a QEtch in
Page 241 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
excess of 30 mils TAS (RE) will advise on the options available to
ensure all rounds are captured. Solutions may include adjusting
the range geometry, metrication of the stop butt (see section
8.6.4 Height on Page on page 243) or the extension of the RDA
based on worst case ammunition trajectories. If there is
insufficient land for RDA extension and insufficient funds to cover
adjusting the range geometry then the range will need to be
assessed by WDA Lab to ensure the minimum level of safety has
been met.
8.5.2 SITING
Careful site selection for the GR should enable construction without extensive
earthworks. A site on level dry ground is preferable with the LofF in a northerly
direction. Consideration is also to be given to the level of risk around the DA
boundary when choosing the alignment of the range and this should take
precedence over the problem of firing into the sun. Ground producing a depressed
line of sight with a flat or slightly concave range floor is ideal. Rising ground may
require additional earthwork to raise the more distant firing points. Rocky, marshy
or undulating ground should be avoided as should sites that would produce a very
hollow range floor (see Figure 8-2: Effects of Hollow Sites on Page 259).
8.5.3 WORST CASE LINES OF SIGHT
The normal firing point width is 4 m: a firer may adopt a firing position anywhere
on the firing point. As there is no single position on the flank firing points that can
be designated "worst case" the centre line is taken in the design process.
Page 242 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.6 CONSTRUCTION - STOP BUTT
8.6.1 PURPOSE
The butt stops most aimed direct shot and low angle ricochets. It also allows the
firer and coach to observe the fall of shot. Sand or granulated rubber bullet
catchers may also be incorporated into the stop butt behind the target positions for
ease of maintenance (see section 8.6.7 Bullet Catcher or Material Boxes on page on
page 244). However, a stop butt is not a mandatory requirement if a WDA is
available and QE does not exceed 150 mils (8.5°). A reduced stop butt is however
still useful to observe fall of shot and it will capture the majority of shot fired
enabling recovery of the lead.
8.6.2 LOCATION
The stop butt is sited behind the targets and it will normally be at right angles to
the range centre line but a maximum deviation of 180mils (10°) is permitted. It
should not be less than 25 m from the gallery target line to prevent backsplash into
the gallery. The space can also be used for shooting at 25 m provided the stop butt
meets the criteria in this Chapter. and there is sufficient land beyond the GR flank
RDA for the pistol WDA. In this case provision for targetry at the base of the stop
butt may be considered. Refer to TAS (RE) to determine the pistol WDA required
based on flank target positions. On ranges where the stop butt is less than 25m
provision must be made to prevent backsplash into the gallery. See Chapter 2 Table
2 on Page 50.
Page 243 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.6.3 STRUCTURE
The stop butt is a bank constructed from stone-free soil. It may have a rock core
faced with a minimum of 1.5 m of compacted soil free from large stones (>30 mm
in any dimension). Measures to reinforce stop butts to take account of torrential
rain should be used particularly where stop butts are constructed entirely of sand.
Timber framing or geo-grid around shooting in boxes have proven to be successful
solutions.
8.6.4 HEIGHT
The height of the stop butt is determined by setting a boning rod on top of the
mantlet and, when viewed from the prone position, at the 100 firing point, the crest
of the stop butt, should not appear lower than the boning rod, along the whole
length of the stop butt. Where a GR exceeds the QE restriction, lifting the stop butt
to capture the CofF may provide a solution. Details for imperial and metric GR are
illustrated in Figure 8-3 on Page 260. It must however be established that the
mantlet is the correct height (see section 8.8.1 Length and Height on Page 248).
The minimum height for the stop butt boning rod is to be 5m though on existing
imperial ranges it may be 3.05m as illustrated in Fig 8-3.
8.6.5 CREST LENGTH AND WIDTH
The length of the stop butt crest is determined when a horizontal angle of 60 mils
(3.40°) applied to each worst case flank LofS on the 100 firing point meets the line
of the stop butt crest as shown in Figure 8-3: Determination of Stop Butt Height &
Length on Page 260. The stop butt must be level across the crest and not less than
1.5 m wide over the full length.
Page 244 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.6.6 PROFILE
The face profile of the stop butt is constructed and maintained at an angle of 600
mils (34°) (S) to the horizontal (2:3). This ensures the minimum bullet impact
angle of 533 mils (30°) (C) is achieved, which is the minimum angle required to
limit ricochet. The rear of the stop butt and its ends should be constructed at the
natural angle of repose for the soil type. Stability can be enhanced with geotextiles,
geogrids or a combination of the two, and the surface should be seeded to assist
stability. If drainage or soil types make these slopes impracticable, the face of the
stop butt may be terraced. The design of a terraced stop butt must avoid terrace
steps in the main impact area behind the targets (see section 8.6.10 Terracing on
Page 245).
8.6.7 BULLET CATCHER OR MATERIAL BOXES
A sand or granulated rubber bullet catcher may be formed on the face of the stop
butt. With sand, this will help with identifying the fall of shot and with either, will
simplify de-leading. An area behind the target is excavated to 500 mm deep and
filled with coarse sand as specified in Chapter 2 or granulated rubber. To assist in
maintaining the profile, these boxes may be constructed of timber and set into the
stop butt. The height and width of the box is to be such that when a 1.22 m2 (4ft2)
target is installed, at least 0.3 m of material all around it is visible to the firer from
the 100 firing point. Granulated rubber should not be placed over the whole stop
butt due to the fire risk. It is easier to control a fire in smaller shooting in boxes.
Light rubber sheet or shredded rubber tiles may be used to stop granulate jumping
out of the boxes following bullet strike. This also helps prevent grass from grass
cutters and other debris getting into the granulate.
Page 245 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.6.8 FLAG POLES AND LIGHTS
A flag pole 6-9 m high manufactured from non- ricochet inducing material such as
timber, hollow aluminium or penetrable composite material is mounted at one end
of the stop butt on which a 1.8 m2 red range in use flag is flown. If the range is
authorised for night firing, a red warning light is mounted on top of the pole
8.6.9 LANE NUMBERS
Lane numbers constructed of timber and WBP grade plywood as shown in Figure
15-4 are positioned at the foot of the mantlet. The lane numbers are to be 1 m high
and painted black in silhouette or white numbers on a 1.2 m high black
background. On ranges in excess of 600, the height of the numbers should be
increased to 1.4 m. For night firing or falling plate practices, the lane numbers must
be removable.
NOTE: Any shots aimed over the top of the stop butt will almost certainly leave the
RDA.
8.6.10 TERRACING
a. Hill Stop Butts. Engineering considerations may make it necessary
to terrace a stop butt such as when a hill is used. Each terrace
must be cut with a face angle of 34° (2:3) (S) and the top of the
terrace sloped back from the face at 4.8° (1:12). Terraces may
be wide enough to accept a small excavator but the possibility of
ricochet from the edge will limit the depth of each terrace to
ensure capture of the round by the terrace above. The layout of
terracing must be planned using established ricochet data.
Page 246 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Terraces should be constructed to avoid the main area of impact
behind the targets.
b. Stop Butt and Mantlet Cross-fall. When a cross-fall exceeds 2.3°
(1:25), it will be necessary to form a step or steps in the length of
the stop butt and mantlet. The slope should be formed at the
natural angle of repose for the soil and the resulting horizontal
slope length added between lanes. To meet the minimum crest
width, lower levels will have an increased crest width to avoid a
change in the face angle. A step in the stop butt must be offset
from the step in the mantlet to cover the flank angle distance (60
mils (3.4°)) from the LofS at the 100 firing point. The
requirements for a stepped stop butt and mantlet are shown at
Figure 8-5 on Page 262.
8.7 MARKERS' GALLERY
8.7.1 GENERAL
The markers' gallery is designed to work with the Hythe target frames. It must
provide sufficient height to allow both front and back targets to be lowered out of
sight to the firers and to enable the marker to paste up a 1.8 m screen without
standing on a step or reaching above the gallery roof. This is not easily achieved
and the design dimensions for gallery construction must be carefully adhered to.
Figures 8-6 and 8-7 show a typical layout and cross-section of a gallery and the
design requirements. The gallery should be at right angles to the axis of the range
but, like the stop butt, a deviation of 180 mils 10°) is permitted. It is desirable that
the gallery and stop butt are parallel but this is not essential.
Page 247 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.7.2 CONSTRUCTION
The construction should be of brick or concrete, pre-cast concrete cantilever
sections are ideal. Provision must be made behind this wall for the relief of
hydraulic pressures. The target trench is the lowest point in the gallery and has to
be properly drained by laying the bottom of the trench to a self-draining fall from
the centre out towards each end of the gallery or from one end to the other over its
full length. From the end the drainage may lead into the range system or into a
soakaway. It may be necessary to install a lift pump but every effort must be made
to prevent flooding in the gallery area.
8.7.3 FIXTURES
A seat for each marker is fixed to the gallery wall opposite each target and
provision made for telephones. A flag pole of the same material specified in section
8.6.8 Flag Poles and Lights on Page 245 is fixed to one end of the gallery for
mounting a 1.2 x 0.9 m red butt flag. Access to the gallery is at this end.
8.7.4 TARGET SPACING
Ranges built to imperial units have target spacing which give a lane width of 4 yds.
This is the minimum requirement to ensure sufficient working space for markers in
the gallery and to give sufficient visual separation between targets. Even at short
range, firers may have difficulty identifying their targets if this spacing is reduced.
On new ranges lane widths should be 4 m.
Page 248 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.7.5 TARGET AND TARGET FRAMES
The in-service target frame is the 'Hythe' pattern shown in Figure 8-8: The Hythe
Pattern Target Frame on Page 266. The original frames were built of malleable iron
and are normally supplied by McQueens Ltd of Galashiels who hold the original
drawings. The calculations for setting the height of the target frames are critical for
the safe operation of the range. Great care must be taken in ensuring accurate
design and setting out the work. Details of the service specifications to be applied
to the target carriages for fixing Figure targets and target poles are shown in Figure
8-9: Fixing Details for Figure Target in Hythe Frames on Page 267. The legs of the
targets used in target frames must allow the bottom edge of the target to show 75
mm above the crest of the mantlet as seen from all firing points (see Figure 8-10:
Crest Board Clearance and Mantlet Damage on Page 268).
8.8 MANTLET
8.8.1 LENGTH AND HEIGHT
In terms of safety it is the mantlet that determines whether the range is an
imperial or metric range. Whenever possible, the mantlet length should be
extended beyond the flank targets to protect structures at the ends of the gallery.
As a guide the flanks of the mantlet should be in the LofS from the 100 firing point
to the flanks of the stop butt. The minimum height of the mantlet is to be 2m. On
existing imperial ranges it may be 1.8m. (See Figure 8-3: Determination of Stop
Butt Height & Length on Page 260). The full minimum height must be visible from
all firing points in the prone posture. For mantlets that are higher, it is only
necessary to see the minimum height from the crest board down from each firing
point, not the whole mantlet. The mantlet and the stop butt height are key factors
in justifying confidence in the capture of direct aimed shot and low, long ranging
ricochets.
Page 249 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.8.2 CONSTRUCTION
A typical cross section of a mantlet is illustrated in Figure 15-7. The mantlet is
formed of compacted soil free from large stones (>30 mm in any one dimension).
It must not be less than 1.5 m thick at any point. A rock or rubble core may be
incorporated providing there is a minimum of 500 mm of stone-free cover. The
forward face has to be constructed to a minimum slope of 34 degrees (2:3) to the
range floor. Due to increased use of targets mounted on the range floor in front of
the mantlet, shooting in boxes 1.4 m x 1 m wide (T) should be provided in each
lane to facilitate effective de-leading. The depth of the sand or granulate in each
box is around 450 mm perpendicular to the surface, 500 mm in line with the path
of the bullets. To reduce ricochet the top of the mantlet is raked back to a slope of
1:12 (S) below the highest LofS. To ensure that the correct height and width are
maintained, the crest of the mantlet is defined by a timber profile board 230 mm x
40 mm set on edge along the full length of the mantlet. The face of the mantlet
should match the range floor. In accordance with Health and Safety at Work
Regulations, protection for maintenance staff should be provided where there is an
open drop into the gallery. The minimum measure is a steep drop warning sign at
each end of the mantlet. The type protection provided on the mantlet is to be
dictated by local risk assessment based on the degree of permitted and
unauthorised access onto the mantlet.
8.8.3 FALLING PLATE TARGETS
Falling plate shooting-in boxes set into the face of the mantlet lower the CofF,
which increases the risk of ricochet off the range floor and therefore requires the
2900 m RDA template to be applied (see Figure 8-1A, page 257). To avoid lowering
the CofF, shooting-in boxes may be set into the stop butt between target frames on
the normal LofS. However, as this creates a backsplash hazard, the markers'
gallery should not to be manned. To fire falling plate practices on gallery ranges
Page 250 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
without the need to increase the Gallery RDA, falling plate boxes or covers over the
steel plates mounted on the mantlet may be used (5.56 mm only; refer to TAS for
details). Only the issued falling plate targets are to be used (see Chapter 10).
8.9 TARGET STORE and WORKSHOP
The preferred position for the target store and workshop is at one end of the
markers' gallery (see Figure 8-6 on Page 263). On ranges with up to twelve targets
it will be found that a combined target store and workshop will be adequate. In the
case of larger ranges it is advisable to have the workshop sited centrally and the
target store sited in the gallery. The workshop should be equipped with a large flat-
topped target table, a carpenter's bench, cupboards, and adequate heating and
lighting. A water supply is desirable. RAO should be aware that most target stores
and workshops on GR are located within the GR RDA. Personnel in this area are
exposed to rounds that “pop over” the stop butt. This is a particular hazard when
7.62mm is fired.
8.10 RANGE FLOOR
8.10.1 LEVELLING
Visibility of targets must be maintained throughout, when advancing from the 400
firing point forward. Drainage ditches, streams etc need to be culverted and
brought approximately to ground level. It is not satisfactory to place footbridges
across such obstacles as timber will become slippery, and steel and concrete are a
ricochet hazard. Depth of soil cover on the range floor is 150mm (S) and should be
free from stones >30mm in any direction.
Page 251 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.10.2 DISTANCE AND LANE MARKERS
Timber markers are suitably positioned to show lane numbers and the firing
distance of the firing points.
8.11 FIRING POINTS
8.11.1 CONSTRUCTION
The minimum height of the mantlet (see section 8.8.1 Length & Height on Page
248) must be visible to the firer in the prone posture or in a firing trench. The crest
board must be 450mm above the range floor. In addition, to reduce ricochet, no
ground or obstruction is to intrude into a line 450mm below the prone firer's LofS.
8.11.2 SURFACES
Firing point surfaces should be slip resistant, have no trip hazards and designed to
minimise maintenance bearing in mind that they are exposed to shot from firing
points to the rear.
8.11.3 FIRE TRENCHES
Properly drained fire trenches together with a post to simulate fire from cover are
normally provided at the 100m, 200m and 300m firing points but may not be
possible if the water table is high. The trenches may be revetted with timber or pre-
formed concrete sections with a 225mm timber surround at the top to prevent
ricochet. For reasons of safety, a lid to cover the trench when it is not in use should
be provided.
Page 252 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.12 COMMUNICATIONS
8.12.1 EXTERNAL
A means of summoning the emergency services, ideally a land laid telephone, is to
be available.
8.12.2 INTERNAL
Provision should be made for the following telephone communications:
a. Gallery. The connection point in the gallery should be placed centrally
to each bank of twelve targets and is to be an external weatherproof
fitting made vandal-proof by putting it into a secure access box with the
cable in securely fixed trunking. The spur that runs to the side of the
range to connect with the line from the firing points is in a cable duct
buried 600mm deep.
b. Firing Points. The connections at the firing points are to be external
weatherproof fittings located to the rear of the firing point. Preferably
the connections are set below ground in a damp-proof container with a
50mm thick timber lid set flush with the range floor. An above ground
connection point should be provided on a pole set as low as possible but
not more than 500mm high protected by 100mm thick timber or
500mm of earth ramped up from the range floor.
c. Inspection Pits. All inspection pits on or adjacent to the range floor are
fitted with 50 mm thick timber covers set flush with the range floor.
Page 253 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
8.13 MAINTENANCE
8.13.1 RANGE PROFILE SURVEY
The effects of weathering, soil movement and attrition will cause changes in the
range profile. Range inspectors should call on TAS (RE) if they are in any doubt on
ballistic element compliance.
8.13.2 RESPONSIBILITIES
Maintenance is the responsibility of the CFI. Responsibilities may be divided as
follows:
a. Range Staff. See HPRS Volume 1 Chapter 2, para 2.4.4.
b. ED.
(1) Grounds.
(2) Fencing and sign posting. (See Chapter 2).
(3) Structures, roads and drainage including stability of slopes and erosion control.
(4) Water and electricity supplies.
(5) Periodic refurbishment of the range structure.
c. Equipment Management. Repairing and servicing equipment installed by single Police contract.
8.13.3 FREQUENCY
Proper maintenance is dependent upon good liaison between the CFI, Range Safety
Inspectors and the ED supported by a properly scheduled maintenance programme.
A heavily used range may need one day's maintenance each week plus one or two
Page 254 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
days' maintenance by the Range Staff each month. Two closed periods of a week or
so may be needed each year for building and earthworks repair; this work should
be combined with the contract repair of equipment.
8.13.4 BULLET CATCHER
The requirements for maintaining the bullet catcher sand, granulate and de-leading
are given in Chapter 2, pages 99 to 106.
8.13.5 MANTLET SCOOPING
Low shots can cause deep scooping to the front of the mantlet in line with the
targets. This can generate high ricochet and may allow shot to penetrate through
the mantlet to strike target frames. Maintaining the mantlets correct profile is
essential. Timber or shredded rubber/polymer blocks may be used to minimise the
maintenance effort providing 75mm of clearance is maintained. (see Figure 8-12:
Mantlet Protection – Options for Ease of Maintenance on Page 270).
8.14 COMPLIANCE CHECKS
The following areas are considered during a compliance check:
a. Authorised weapons, ammunition and practices (Range SOPs).
b. Firing point dimensions, construction, lane identification, alignment and profiles.
c. Visibility of required mantlet face from all firing points.
d. Mantlet profile, height and width.
e. Full exposure of all targets from all firing points, spacing identification and target centre height.
Page 255 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
f. Minimum clearance over mantlet crest board.
g. Minimum clearance over Hythe Frame.
h. Stop butt alignment, distance from target line, size and profile.
i. Falling plate target position and construction, if applicable.
j. Quadrant Elevation to target centre. (CofF then added to determine max QE).
k. Template alignment.
l. Flags, signage, communications.
Page 256 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-1: RDA TEMPLATE GALLERY RANGE
NOTES:
1. ADH: 5.56, & 9mm: 500 ft, 7.62 Ball 750 ft, 7.62 mm Tracer: 1500 ft AGL. 2. When firing 7.62 mm Ball an air sentry may be required. 3. This template only applies to ranges built to metric standards (see Figure 8-1B: HEF
WDA Template SA Ammunition QE > 150 < 1250mils on Page 258) and to those constructed to Reference W with a QE restriction (QEmax) of 70mils (30mils to target centre QEtch)).
4. Maximum MV / ME permitted - see Table 4: SA Ammunition Maximum MV and ME Limitations (C) on Page 71.
5. Tracer DA shown in red.
Page 257 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-1A: RDA TEMPLATE, <QE 150MILS - ETR
(RDA for 5.56mm and 7.62mm ammunition shown)
1. ADH: 5.56mm and 9mm: 500ft, 7.62mm Ball 750ft, 7.62mm Tracer 1500ft. (For ranges where range floor is not shaped use FFA ADH detail in Chapter 2 Table 1.)
2. When firing 7.62mm Ball an air sentry may be required. 3. See HPRS VOLUME III for pistol use. 4. Where unprotected hard surfaces exist on the range floor within the CofF, hard template
wings are to be applied (Figure 8-1c on Page 258) 5. The Template is asymmetrical due to the 200m target line offset.
Page 258 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-1B: HEF WDA TEMPLATE SA AMMUNITION QE > 150 < 1250MILS
FIGURE 8-1C: 8.6MM LONG RANGE RIFLE FFA TEMPLATE
Ser Ammunition Measurements to be Applied
(m) (m) (m) (m) (mils)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
1 5.56 & 7.62mm 4000 2100 200 325 150
2 12.7mm (0.5”) 6400 4000 250 350 150
3 .22”, < 330m/s 1450 800 100 175 150
4 .22”, > 330m/s 1550 800 100 175 150
5 9mm ball 1825 1000 150 200 40
Note: 1. Dimension ‘d’ represents an allowance for wind. 2. For ADH refer to Chapter 2 Table 1. 3. Ball, tracer or AP. 4. 9mm (less moving vehicle) Vertex Ht. 1225m
Reference: D/DEO(CS)/70/49/5/2 Mar 98
Page 259 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
NOTES:
6. 1. The C of F is omitted from the template as it has been included in the overall calculation.
7. 2. This template is for 8.6mm ball ammunition only. 8. 3. ADH – 3000ft.
FIGURE 8-2: EFFECTS OF HOLLOW SITES
Page 260 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-3: DETERMINATION OF STOP BUTT HEIGHT & LENGTH
Page 261 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-4: LANE MARKER NUMBERS
Page 262 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-5: STEPPED MANTLET AND STOP BUTT
Page 263 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-6: MARKERS’ GALLERY LAYOUT
Page 264 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Page 265 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-7: MARKERS GALLERY DETAIL
Page 266 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-8: THE HYTHE PATTERN TARGET FRAME
Page 267 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-9: FIXING DETAIL FOR FIGURE TARGET IN HYTHE FRAMES
Page 268 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-10: CREST BOARD CLEARANCE AND MANTLET DAMAGE
Page 269 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-11: ‘SHOOTING-IN’ BOXES
Page 270 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 8-12: MANTLET PROTECTION - OPTIONS FOR EASE OF MAINTENANCE
Page 271 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 9: The Converted Gallery Range And Electric Target (Limited Danger Area) Range
(READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH CHAPTER 8)
9.1 INTRODUCTION
Converted Gallery Range CGR is a Gallery Range that has been converted to be
equipped with fixed electric targets (FET), each of which provide two `fall-when-hit'
targets per shooting lane (target details are given in Chapter 10). If the mantlet is
constructed as shown in Figure 9-2: Siting of FET and Access Path on page 284,
automatic marking system (AMS) may be installed without further major works.
When a new range is constructed without a gallery but with FET, it is termed an
Electric Target (Limited Danger Area) Range (ET(LDA)R). The CGR and ET(LDA)R
can be used to fire the same SA as the GR using the Gallery RDA template.
9.2 Aim
This chapter describes the construction requirements to convert a GR to a CGR and
the construction of a new ET(LDA)R. The features which do not differ from the GR
are not covered in this Chapter and for which reference should be made to Chapter
8.
Page 272 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
9.3 CONVERSION CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL
9.3.1 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
No range design work should start until full details of the targetry to be used are to
hand. Compliance cannot be achieved without full details of the targets and target
mechanisms. The firing point crest board, mantlet crest board, stop butt and target
centres are all linked in the design to achieve compliance. Ranges with FET and
AMS will require different design detailing to those ranges without AMS due to
differing target requirements. Ducting should always be included in the mantlet
whether or not AMS is to be installed to enable AMS installation at a later date.
9.3.2 LAND REQUIREMENTS
The construction of a new CGR or ET(LDA)R may be more expensive than an ETR.
Considerations such as land availability may, however, make the ET(LDA)R the
preferred choice. A comparison of the land requirement is:
a. CGR, ET(LDA)R. Length 2400 m, width 750 m and an area of 1,800,000 m2 (180 hectares or 445 acres).
b. ETR. Length 3325 m, width 1132 m and an area of 3,763,900 m2
(376 hectares or 930 acres).
9.3.3 CONVERSION
The conversion of a GR to a CGR requires that all elements of the range are
brought up to full new GR specification. The designer / contractor must establish
the current range profile and layout in relation to compliance prior to conversion.
Ranges with firing points set out in imperial should be converted to metric but it is
unnecessary to alter the lane widths and target spacing to metric. By installing FETs
Page 273 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
on the mantlet of a GR the GR RDA will increase in width due to re alignment of
LofS to target centres. To facilitate AMS, it will be necessary to ensure the LofS for
each firing position is at right angles to the targets (see section 9.3.4 Layout for
Automatic Marking System on Page 273). Conversion will include:
a. Reconstruction of the mantlet and installation of FET.
b. Realignment of lanes if necessary.
c. Construction of the control building.
d. Installation of electric power and target control circuits.
e. It is most likely that there will be an increase to the stop butt dimensions if mantlet height changes or firing points are taken back to metric distances.
9.3.4 LAYOUT FOR AUTOMATIC MARKING SYSTEM
AMS often requires precise range layout to assure accuracy in recording the fall of
shot. If firing lanes are re aligned the RDA must be re confirmed. Where AMS
equipment requires FET equipment to move back from the crest board, careful
design is required to ensure full target exposure with clearances. If AMS is to be
installed either at the time of conversion or at a later date and for new ranges refer
to TAS (RE) for details of current AMS installation requirements.
9.4 MANTLET
The reconstruction details for the mantlet are shown in Figure 9-2: Siting of FET
and Access Path on page 284. The depth from the markers' gallery to the mantlet
crest board must be able to accommodate the target system (including AMS) and
access path. The face profile of the mantlet is retained at the recommended 34°
(2:3) from the horizontal whilst the full face at minimum height of 2m must remain
visible to the firer from all firing points. Extending the mantlet by filling on to the
Page 274 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
existing construction is not good practice. The mantlet is best totally reconstructed
as a monolithic structure of fully compacted 150 mm thick layers of stone-free soil,
which should ensure that there is no settlement under the additional imposed
loading. A rock core is permitted but this must be covered and faced with stone-
free soil to a depth of 500 mm on the front face. In accordance with Management
of Health and Safety at Work Regulations , protection should be provided where
there is a drop into the gallery. To avoid the fall from height hazard when working
on the mantlet on CGR it is possible to provide the access path in front of the
mantlet.
See Figure 9-2: Siting of FET and Access Path on page 284.
9.4.1 LofS CLEARANCE
The slope from front to back on top of the mantlet is dependant upon the levels on
the range floor and in particular the level of firing point crest boards. It is important
that at the design stage the following clearances are resolved to ensure full target
exposure and clearances. (Note: With current FETs it may not be possible to
achieve all clearances.)
a. FET clearance 50 mm below the lowest LofS.
b. Bottom of target 75 mm from highest LofS.
c. No ricochet inducing surfaces from any LofS.
d. Gallery frames clear of the lowest LofS.
Page 275 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
9.5 STOP BUTT
Existing Gallery Ranges have a 1 .8m mantlet and the stop butt is determined with
a 3.05m pole set on the mantlet crest board. Conversion will bring the mantlet
height up to at least 2.0m and a 5.0m pole set on the mantlet crest board is used
to determine the increased stop butt height required.
9.6 TARGETRY
9.6.1 TARGETS
Only authorised targets described in Chapter 10 may be used. All targetry is to
comply with section 9.4.1 LofS Clearance on Page 274. Falling plate targets may be
used with the same conditions and limitations applicable to the GR.
9.6.2 FIXED ELECTRIC TARGET LOCATIONS
The FET consists of 24 units, 2 for each of the 12 lanes (see Figure 9-1: Layout
CGR on Page 283). Each unit is normally housed in a pre-cast concrete box
(coffin). It is often necessary to enclose coffins with vandal-proof steel lids. The
coffins in each pair are set slightly staggered to allow their lids to open without
obstruction; coffins with single lids need not be offset. However, each coffin must
be placed symmetrically across the centre line of the firing lane to facilitate AMS.
9.6.3 PROTECTION
Coffins are protected against strike by a 12 mm thick armoured steel sheet to the
specification provided in Chapter 2. Ricochet from the steel is reduced by timber or
shredded rubber protection (see Figure 9-2: Siting of FET and Access Path on page
284. Depending on site conditions, all elements must be set to a level so that no
Page 276 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
part is above the line from the mantlet crest at a fall of 4.85 (1:12) from the worst
case LofS. In addition, it is necessary to ensure that no part of the rear of the coffin
is exposed to the firer standing on any firing point. A 50 mm margin for safety is to
be provided between the worst LofS and the rear the coffin (see Figure 9-2: Siting
of FET and Access Path on page 284).
9.6.4 ACCESS
A path wide enough for the FET trolley is required to replace and maintain FET
mechanisms. This should be laid close to the level of the coffin base to reduce
lifting. If Materials Handling Equipment (MHE) is to be used, the path will have to
be designed to provide access to all equipment on the mantlet as well as a ramp
from the mantlet down to the workshop.
9.6.5 TARGET STORE AND WORKSHOP
Extra space is likely to be required in both the target store and workshop to
accommodate an increased holding of targets for FET. It may be possible to turn
the existing workshop into an extra target store and to build a new workshop
behind the range. Roller tables or lifting gear should be provided to move FETs
within the workshop. The workshop has to be large enough to allow for:
a. Storing spare FET and spare parts.
c. Repairing and servicing FET.
d. A 240 volt AC power supply.
e. Working space for 3 men.
Page 277 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
9.7 CONTROL BUILDING
9.7.1 PURPOSE
This building houses the control, operation and communication systems required to
control the range, activate the targetry and record the number of hits. It is an
operations room which should be sized only to accommodate personnel essential to
running practices.
9.7.2 LOCATION
The control building is usually sited to the right, rear of the 300 m firing point at an
angle optimising the view of the range (see Figure 9-1: Layout CGR on page 283
and Figure 9-2: Siting of FET and Access Path on page 284).
9.7.3 CONSTRUCTION
The control building walls may be constructed of concrete or brick. The walls
exposed to strike must provide ballistic protection and prevent damp entering
where earth banks are used. The protected walls will also need to be designed to
withstand lateral pressures where earth or sand banks are used. The back wall
facing 400 - 600m firing points is constructed to withstand bullet penetration (See
Chapter 2). The rear of the building must be faced so that firers during fire and
movement practices are not exposed to the risk of backsplash (Note. 7.62mm
tracer may backsplash 125m from large sand banks with 34 degree slopes). On
compacted earth slopes the 7.62 mm tracer round are normally captured without
ricochet If earth or sand banks are not used, anti-splash protection is provided with
50mm timber boarding on 50 mm timber battens set vertically to cover the walls
exposed to strike. The timber protection is to be off set to allow inspection of the
protected walls for shot damage or fixed in such a way to allow inspection of the
Page 278 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
wall. The building has a raised floor to give the equipment operators clear view of
targets over the heads of personnel on the firing point. The building should be
vandal-proof.
9.7.4 WARNING FLAGS AND LIGHTS
A 6-9 m high flag pole made of timber, hollow aluminium or non-ricochet inducing
composite material is fixed to the control building at the furthest safety point from
the access door. This pole is for hoisting a 1.8 m2 red range in use flag. A shorter
flag pole is also provided to protect personnel in the control building in a similar
way to that used on a mantlet for a butt party. This flag pole made of the same
material as the main pole is fixed outside the access door. A red light operated from
the control building is fitted to the top of both flag poles for night firing.
9.8 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
9.8.1 ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The provision of a reliable supply of electricity is essential. The power requirement
to successfully use a CGR or ET(LDA)R will vary with the circumstances of each
range but, as a guide, 50 kilovolt Amperes Triple Phase and Neutral (50 kVA TP&N)
is generally satisfactory but a generator seldom is. In addition to electricity for
target mechanisms and control circuits, power should be provided to heat and light:
a. Control building and systems.
b. Range Wardens' workshop.
c. Target store.
Page 279 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
d. Staff shelter and toilets.
e. Night firing warning lights.
9.8.2 FIXED ELECTRIC TARGET
The power supply to FET should be switched and circuit protected. The switch
should be a lockable isolator switch to prevent others accidentally turning on the
power while work on FET is undertaken.
9.9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.9.1 EXTERNAL
A means of summoning the emergency services, ideally a land laid telephone, is to
be available.
9.9.2 INTERNAL
A range telephone system is required to connect the control building to the:
a. RCO at each firing point.
b. Staff shelter.
c. Butts.
d. Target line for testing and maintaining target mechanisms.
Page 280 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
9.9.3 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
A PA system is required with a microphone in the control building and a wandering
microphone for use outside by the RCO. A microphone connection point may be
required at each firing point. Loudspeakers are to be fitted to the control building
and at each end of the main firing point. If the control building is on a flank, the
location of installations may need to be reviewed.
9.9.4 PROTECTION
The down-range telephone connection points must be protected against SA fire by
timber 100 mm thick or 500 mm of well compacted soil. All cables are to be buried
in protective conduit with waterproof connections and fittings.
9.10 MAINTENANCE
9.10.1 RESPONSIBILITIES
The requirements for maintaining a GR apply equally to the CGR and ET(LDA)R.
Maintenance of the range is the responsibility of the RAU and may be divided as
follows:
a. Range Warden. See HPRS Volume 1 Chapter 2, para 2.4.4.
b. Property Management.
(1) Grounds.
(2) Fencing and sign posting. (See Chapter 2.)
(3) Structures, roads and drainage including stability of slopes and erosion control.
Page 281 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
(4) Water and electricity supplies.
(5) Periodic refurbishment of the range structure.
c. Equipment Management. Repairing and servicing equipment installed by
Police contract.
9.10.2 FREQUENCY
Proper maintenance depends on good liaison between the CFI, Range Safety
Inspectors and the ED supported by a properly scheduled maintenance programme.
A heavily used range may need one day's maintenance each week plus one or two
days' maintenance by the Range Staff each month. Two closed periods of a week or
so may be needed each year for repairing buildings and earthworks; this work
should be combined with contract repair of equipment.
9.11 COMPLIANCE CHECKS
The compliance tests are detailed below:
a. Authorised weapons, ammunition and practices (Range SOPs).
b. Firing point type, dimensions, construction, lane identification, alignment and profiles.
c. Visibility of required mantlet face from all firing points.
d. Mantlet profile, height and width.
e. Full exposure of all targets from all firing points, spacing, identification and target centre height.
f. Minimum clearance over mantlet crest board.
g. Protection to coffins and minimum clearance over coffin.
Page 282 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
h. Minimum clearance over Hythe Frame.(where provided)
i. Stop butt alignment, distance from target line, size and profile.
j. Falling plate target position and construction, if applicable.
k. Positioning, alignment and protection to control building.
l. Quadrant Elevation to target centre. (CofF then added to determine max QE).
m. Template alignment.
n. Flags, signage and communications.
Page 283 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 9-1: LAYOUT CGR
NOTE: Double targets for SA systems positioned between the two lanes with
targets in the right hand FET of the left lane and the left hand FET on the right lane.
Page 284 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 9-2: SITING OF FET AND ACCESS PATH
Page 285 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 9-3: SITING OF THE CONTROL BUILDING
Page 286 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 10: Targetry
10.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers the provision, description and maintenance of targetry
approved by the Sponsor for use on the ranges described in previous chapters of
this Volume.
10.2 Definitions
Targetry is the fitted, non-constructed, part of a range and includes:
a. Targets: Targets are the consumable materials struck by shot.
They include pre-formed targets and the basic materials for
making up targets.
b. Target Mechanisms: These expose targets on command and
may be operated manually, by radio when portability is required
or by land line when a mains supply is available at fixed
installations. Mechanisms may be single or multiple function
devices, the latter having the ability to move. Details of manually
operated mechanisms are given in the relevant range chapters.
c. Support Systems: These are ancillary systems, such as the
Automatic Marker System (AMS), which measures the fall of shot
on and around a target by acoustic triangulation and displays the
results on individual monitors and Visual Hit Indicators (VHI).
Page 287 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
10.3 Design Criteria
The use of the approved targetry listed in this Chapter is essential to the safety of a
fixed range as the type; position and size of targets are principal considerations in
range design. LofS, QE and ricochet determine range geometry, which may be
adversely affected if unapproved targetry is used.
10.4 PROVISION
10.4.1 TARGET MECHANISMS AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS
The RAO in consultation with the CFI will decide what target systems will be used
on police ranges. Their responsibilities will include
a. Target mechanisms and support systems, including when appropriate,
their installation and the training of operators and maintenance staff.
b. Spares and spare parts for new mechanisms and support to those
systems on their introduction into service. Thereafter it is the
responsibility of the Estates Department – through the force estates
contract process.
10.4.2 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
CFI in consultation with the Estates Department is responsible for providing the
repair and maintenance of approved in-service target mechanisms and support
systems.
Page 288 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
10.5 FIGURE TARGET MECHANISMS STATIC
10.5.1 FIXED ELECTRIC TARGET (FET)
The FET is an electrically operated target presentation system. Targets are raised
by an operator at a console and may be set for a required exposure period or to
fall-when-hit. An electronic counter records hits. Each mechanism will lift up to
three targets using a triple target bar conversion. FET require to be set into
protected, properly drained concrete housings and protected against rodents and
vandalism. A power supply and signal cabling are needed. Construction details are
contained in Type Drawings. Complex Combined Equipment Schedule (CES)
No.40731 Fixed Electrical Target Ranges lists the components and it is sub-divided
into:
a. CES No.38814 - Target Holding Assembly, Electric, Fixed, 240 V
AC (B2/6920-99-200-9072) or Target Holding Assembly, No. 1,
Electric, Fixed, 240 V AC (B2/6920-99-105-6283).
b. CES No.38815 - Console Target Control, Fixed, 24 V DC
(B2/6920- 99-200-970 1).
c. CES No.38917 - Conversion Kit, Target Holding Assembly, Electric
(B2/6920-99-96 1-4355).
d. CES No.38920 - Parts Kit, Target Holding Assembly, Electric
(B2/6920-99-96 1-8181).
Page 289 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
10.5.2 ELECTRIC SWIVEL TARGET EQUIPMENTS
These electrically operated mechanisms replace the traditional hand operated
turners. Banks of two or three targets per lane are turned through 90° (1600 mils)
by an operator using a hand-held console, which is connected by a cable to the
mechanisms, to expose the targets to the firers. The mechanisms are placed behind
a mantlet so that no part of them is visible to a firer in any firing position on any
firing point. Power supply is either 12 V batteries or mains transformed to 12 V DC.
Although not strictly portable, the mechanisms can be moved to and from a store.
10.5.3 PORTABLE RADIO-OPERATED TARGET EQUIPMENTS
These are primarily used for tactical exercises. They may provide a number of
features such as fall-when-hit, hit counters and displays, and have retaliatory
devices. Targets are radio-controlled with a multi-link possibility. The equipment
has to be well dug in or shielded by a mini mantlet (indoor) bank or bund (outdoor)
so that no part of the mechanism, including the target arm, is visible to a firer in
any firing position from any firing point. A minimum of 500mm of well compacted
earth protection or sandbags is required, although this will require review when
new weapons are brought into service. If the unit is only splash-proof and is to be
left in a pit, drainage will be necessary.
NOTE: Radio controlled target mechanisms present a danger to users if not
properly handled. Detailed preparation instructions and safety precautions are
contained in the User Instructions.
Page 290 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
10.5.4 PORTABLE CABLE OPERATED EQUIPMENT
a. Description: If FET installation is impracticable, portable
cable-operated electric targets provide a fall when-hit- capability
but have no up-and-hold facility which may be unsuitable for
some practices. Installation is carried out by the range staff or
user force referring to the engineering instructions. The
equipment is supplied to CES No.38880 - Target Set Silhouette,
Portable, Electrical/Pneumatic, (B2/6920-99- 106-9201) and
comprises:
(1) 12 target mechanisms and a console.
(2) 36 drums of 100 m long electric cable with connectors.
(3) A 3 m lead with crocodile clips to connect the console to
the battery.
(4) 4 drum carrying handles.
b. Compressed Air Supply. Each mechanism is operated by
compressed air and has two air cylinders. Compressors for
charging the cylinders are shown in Table 1 below:
TABLE 13 - AIR COMPRESSORS
Type Vocabulary No. Description
(a) (b) (c)
Static W2/WX/0415 Plant, Dry Air Charging, Static, S.I. Engine Driven, 5 c.f.m/2500 p.s.i., Reavell, SAT3, Coventry Climax
Mobile W2/4310/99/205/9313 Plant, Dry Air Charging, Mobile, Engine Driven, Bristol Pneumatic Tools Ltd. Policeel BM 4S-7
Page 291 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
10.6 TARGETS AND ACCESSORIES
10.6.1 FIGURE TARGETS
Figure 11, 12, 14 and 20 targets are the basic targets for police training. Figure 11
and 12 targets are also available in reduced sizes to represent the full target
viewed from a greater distance. Figure targets for use with AMS are shown in
Figure 10-1 on Page 295. Other targets suitable for cadets are shown in Figure 10-
2: ARA Targets on 1.220 metre Screen (1) on Page 296. Targets are issued in a
variety of forms for particular applications. These include:
a. Colour. Black and ochre for range use, and black and silver for
field firing exercises.
b. Materials. Plywood veneers with a printed paper facing for static
(stick-in) use or fitting in GR Hythe frames and aluminium or
plastic with a pre-printed facing for fall-when-hit mechanisms.
c. Scoring Circles. Scoring circles are provided on targets for basic
practices. They are not provided on fall-when-hit targets.
d. Optical/Iron Sights. Target designs are varied to suit the type of
sight being used.
e. Various types of judgmental paper facings are available through
police sources.
Page 292 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
10.6.2 1.22 M2 AND 1.83 M2 SCREEN TARGETS
A 1.22 m2 (4 ft2) timber frame is covered with hessian and faced with ochre
coloured paper to form a screen. A Figure 11 or 12 target facing is pasted in the
centre as an aiming mark. Appropriate screen targets are also used for Stage 1 and
2 shooting and for cadet, National Rifle Association (NRA) and ARA competitions.
1.83 m2 (6 ft) screens may be held for NRA and ARA shooting at distances over
400 m, for which Table 2 gives the scoring circle diameters that are marked with
wax crayon.
TABLE 14 - NRA AND ARA SCORING CIRCLE DIAMETERS
Ser Figure Target
Figure 12 Figure 11 or 12
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)
Type A 500 m (mm)
B 300 m (mm)
C 200 m (mm)
D Marksmanship shooting
1 Series A 300 180 120 300 760
(optical sight) 600 360 240 1200 1200 1200 750 750 1200
2 Series B 375 225 150 300 760
(iron sight) 750 450 300 1200 1200 1200 750 750 1200
10.6.3 REPRESENTATIVE SIZES
Targets may be scaled to represent proportions presented at a notional distance,
rather than the true engagement distance. Proportions may be calculated by
applying the formula:
Actual Target Dimension x True Distance = Representative Dimension
Page 293 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Representative Distance
Example: A weapon is to be used at a true engagement distance of 100 m
whereas the practice requires a representative range of 450 m. If the actual width
of the target being engaged is 3.5 m, the representative width will be:
3.5 x 100 = 0.777 m or 777 mm
450
10.6.4 FALLING PLATES
These are made of 8 mm thick armour plate, approximately 300 mm square and
painted white. They are free standing on a narrow flange as shown in Figure 10-4:
Falling Plate and Head-on Tank Target on Page 298, and their positioning and
mounting are shown in Figure 10-11. Only the issued falling plates are authorised
for use.
10.6.5 TARGET SHOOTERS ZEROING TARGETS (NRA)
In order to zero rifles that have an ME exceeding 4500J on Police ranges, zeroing
targets are to be fixed to screens mounted in gallery frames on gallery ranges. The
firers are to set sights for 600m for zeroing at 200m and check that the fall of shot
at the point of impact is central on the target screen.
Page 294 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
NRA Zeroing Target
10.7 TARGET HOLDINGS
The types and quantities of targets held on a range will vary greatly and will
depend on local demand.
10.8 MAINTENANCE
10.8.1 RESPONSIBILITIES
It is the responsibility of the CFI to ensure that all targets and target systems are
to be properly maintained in line with force range standard operating procedures.
Page 295 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 10-1: AMS FIGURE TARGETS
Page 296 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 10-2: ARA TARGETS ON 1.220 METRE SCREEN (1)
Page 297 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 10-3: ARA TARGETS ON 1.220 METRE SCREEN (1)
Page 298 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 10-4: FALLING PLATE AND HEAD-ON TANK TARGET
Page 299 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 10-5: UGL HE TARGET
Page 300 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 11: Control Of Hazardous Substances In Indoor Ranges
11.1 INTRODUCTION
This Chapter lays down the police requirements to ensure that exposure to
emissions from Police weapons in indoor ranges and ranges with enclosed or semi
enclosed firing points do not generate a hazard to those who enter. In particular it
sets out the control measures to be taken to protect those who enter such ranges.
11.1.1 ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH HAZARDS COVERED
Not all emissions from weapons are of sufficient quantity to present a measurable
hazard. The following emissions from Police weapons and resultant dust have been
identified as potentially hazardous in some circumstances:
a. Lead b. Unburnt Propellant c. Accumulated Dust d. Carbon Monoxide
11.2 HAZARDS
11.2.1 LEAD
Inhalation and ingestion of lead can be hazardous to health. When a weapon is
fired, the hot gases produced by the propellant burns the lead from the base of the
bullet, producing lead fume. Lead particles are also stripped from unjacketed
bullets as they travel down the barrel and are subsequently released into the air
around the firer. In addition lead dust is produced when the bullet impacts sand or
Page 301 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
steel bullet catchers at the end of the range. Lead will also be present in any dust
filtered by any extraction system fitted.
11.2.2 UNBURNT PROPELLANT
Unburnt propellant is also released into the range when a SA is fired. It not only
produces a hazard in its own right but also adds to the problem of controlling lead
pollution. Long barrelled weapons with a good breech seal (obturation) may eject
less than 2% unburnt propellant but some pistols can eject more than 7%. Most
unburnt propellant falls in the area of the firing point and immediately in front of
the firers but some will be distributed down range and may be collected in the dust
filters. If unburnt propellant is allowed to accumulate in the range, particularly out
of sight behind wall cladding or fixtures, it could become a significant hazard.
There is currently no simple means of measuring levels of unburnt propellant.
However, it can be assumed that it will always be present in dust, whether visible
or hidden, in the range if that range has been used during the period.
11.2.3 ACCUMULATED DUST
Any dust allowed to accumulate in a range is likely to contain both lead and
unburnt propellant. If made airborne either by movement of air or the shockwave
created by the blast from the muzzle, it can become an inhalation hazard. Firers in
the prone position and personnel inspecting, cleaning or maintaining the range are
most at risk from this hazard. When dust is collected, such as in a vacuum cleaner
bag, or if permitted to accumulate, it may also become an explosive hazard.
Page 302 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.2.4 CARBON MONOXIDE
Carbon Monoxide (CO) is released into the air each time a weapon is discharged.
The amount of CO expelled is dependent upon the ammunition cartridge used.
These gasses are light and will disperse in the direction of any air flow. This hazard
need only be considered in ranges that have no mechanical or natural ventilation
and in all ranges with small enclosed firing points.
11.3 UK REGULATIONS
11.3.1 CONTROL OF LEAD AT WORK (CLAW) REGULATIONS
The following terms have been extracted with a summary from the CLAW
Regulations and Approved Code of Practice. For a full explanation refer to the CLAW
Regulations.
Ser Term Summary
1 Action level Blood-lead concentration of: • women of reproductive capacity 25µg/dl • young person 40µg/dl • Any other employee 50µg/dl
2 Biological monitoring Includes measuring of a person’s blood-lead concentration.
3 Control measure Measures taken to reduce exposure to lead such as systems of work, cleaning, engineering controls and the provision and use of PPE.
4 OEL limit Reg.2 Occupational Exposure Limit for lead - 0.15mg/m3
5 Risk assessment Reg.5
Identify those who may be exposed to significant levels of lead in air and apply standard Risk Assessment principles. [Identify hazards, eliminate those that may be eliminated, prioritise the remainder and apply control measures to reduce as far as possible the residual hazards.]
Page 303 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
6 Significant exposure Reg.2 For the purpose of this legislation, “significant” in
relation to exposure to lead means exposure in the following circumstances:
(a) where any employee is or is liable to be exposed to a concentration of lead in the atmosphere exceeding half the occupational exposure limit for lead;
(b) where there is a substantial risk of any employee ingesting lead; or
(c) where there is a risk of contact between the skin and lead alkyls or other substances containing lead which can be absorbed through the skin
7 Young person Reg.2 Has not attained the age of 18 and who is not a woman of reproductive capacity
8 Intermittent exposure Reg.5
Exposure to lead compounds for only a few hours over a 40hr week but that exposure may exceed 1/2 OEL over an 8 hr period. if • exposure level is below OEL when averaged
over 8hrs • is below 1/2 OEL when averaged over 40hrs • no substantial risk from surface or skin
contamination. All the above should be covered by appropriate risk assessments.
9 Control measures Reg.6
• ventilation - sufficient general ventilation • reduce exposure to minimum • regular cleaning - wet methods • prohibiting eating and drinking • provide washing facilities
10 Air monitoring Reg.9 • Required where the employer assesses that employees may be exposed to significant Levels of lead in air. • Maximum period between monitoring is
12months.
11 Monitoring records Reg.9(5)
Kept for min 5yrs.
12 Medical surveillance Required for those likely to be or are exposed to significant levels of lead in air.
Page 304 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.3.2 CARBON MONOXIDE (CO)
The UK Regulations relating to the control of exposure to CO are contained in the
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations. The Regulations
state that control of exposure will only be treated as adequate if the principles of
good practice are applied and the workplace exposure limit in not exceeded. The
Army Medical Directorate Environmental Health Monitoring Team (AMD EHMT) is
able to provide advice and support in this area. Below are the long and short term,
Time Weighted Average (TWA), CO workplace exposure limits published in the
Health & safety Executive’s document EH40.
Workplace Exposure Limit (WEL)
Long term exposure limit (8hr TWA referenced period)
Short term exposure limit (15min reference period)
ppm mg.m-3 ppm mg.m-3
30 35 200 232
11.3.3 CATEGORY OF USER
There are several categories of range user to be considered under the CLAW
regulations.
(1) Police training staff.
(2) RCOs and Safety supervisors.
(3) Range Inspectors.
(4) Cleaners / Contractors.
(5) Police employees
Page 305 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.3.4 LEVEL OF EXPOSURE TO LEAD
All personnel in an indoor range are exposed to the lead hazard produced by firing.
In a clean range the degree of exposure is generally very low dependent upon the
number and nature of rounds fired and mitigated by the effectiveness of any
ventilation provided. Personnel such as RCOs, supervisors and instructors are likely
to be exposed for longer periods than the firers. Inspection, cleaning and
maintenance staff will be exposed to residual dust in the range as a result of their
activities. Movement forward of the firing point should be kept to a minimum as this
is where some lead dust will settle. Provided that appropriate dust filters have been
correctly installed and maintained within the extract ventilation system there should
be no risk of exposure, externally, from the exhausted air.
a. Low Use Ranges. Low use is defined as 2 or 3 sessions per week and an average total of up to 500 rounds per week, 26,000 rounds per year.
b. Full Time Use Ranges. Full time use is defined as those ranges
that are expected to be used on a daily basis or fire over 26,000 rounds per year.
11.4 ASSESSMENT
11.4.1 CHIEF FIREARMS INSTRUCTOR (CFI) RESPONSIBILITIES
CFI’s are to assess each of the indoor ranges in their area of responsibility to
determine the level of exposure to lead in air and CO as set out in section 11.3.2 on
Page 304 & section 11.3.4 Level of Exposure to Lead Page 305. Where ranges or
test facilities are used full time or exceed 26,000 rounds per year they are to
undertake full lead in air monitoring to establish the OEL for that particular range
and for each particular use. These are to be monitored for each type of use. If a
range is used by more than one group of users, each use must be assessed.
Page 306 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.4.2 FACTORS INCLUDED IN THE ASSESSMENT
The lead and CO exposure assessment should take into account the nature of all
activities taking place in the range including dry training, inspecting, maintaining,
monitoring and cleaning, as well as all shooting practices. The assessment should
consider both users and visitors. Personnel such as RCOs, supervisors and
instructors, who are employed routinely in the range are potentially at the greatest
risk as they may be in the range for extended periods whether or not firing is
taking place. Cleaners, works officers and inspectors are likely to be exposed to
higher levels of lead for shorter periods.
11.5 AIR MONITORING
11.5.1 REQUIREMENT
Full lead in air monitoring is to be carried out in accordance with current CLAW
Regulations where the risk assessment indicates that any other person using the
range is liable to receive significant exposure to lead and in the following
circumstances:
a. When a new or a refurbished full time use indoor firing range is
commissioned.
b. An existing indoor range has a change of use that may expose
users to significant levels of lead or has more than 26,000 rounds
fired in it each year.
Page 307 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.5.2 AIR MONITORING
Air monitoring may be carried out by a specialist contractor. For CO it is a direct
measurement undertaken in the range. For lead, air filters are placed on the firers
and at several points down range during peak maximum capacity firing in the
range. The amount of lead collected by these filters is then measured to determine
the lead in air levels for that range.
11.5.3 RECORDING RESULTS
All monitoring must be recorded in the Range Log Form 906. A certificate giving the
results should be provided and displayed following each measurement of lead in air
from air monitoring stating the conditions, if any, under which the range may
operate.
11.5.4 SIGNIFICANT LEVELS OF LEAD IN AIR
If following lead in air assessment of a range indicates that exposure to lead is
significant, ie greater than 0.075mg/m3, the NPIA should be consulted to
determine the way forward. Where an assessment finds that there is a significant
level of lead at the target end of a range personnel who maintain and inspect the
bullet trap shall if not already doing so, undergo medical surveillance.
11.5.5 SIGNIFICANT LEVELS OF CO
In ranges where there is little or no air flow, particularly in smaller firing rooms, it
will be necessary to improve the ventilation arrangements if personal CO exposures
exceed the WEL.
Page 308 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.6 RESPONSIBILITIES
11.6.1 CFI
The CFI is responsible for ensuring that anybody using or working in its indoor
range is not put at unacceptable risk from hazards listed above. They are to ensure
the following:
a. Works. As those ranges with ventilation systems depend on the
efficiency of the ventilation system to meet CLAW Regulations, all
ventilation systems are subject to a statutory inspection at least
annually. Estates Departments are to ensure that deep cleaning
by contract is properly completed in accordance with guidance set
out in this document.
b. Information and Training. The CFI is responsible for ensuring that
adequate information and training on the precautions to be
observed are given to all personnel under their control who
operate, use, maintain or clean indoor ranges on the risks from
lead and un-burnt propellant. Local Health & Safety officers can
provide information and training on the correct use and disposal
of PPE. Fire Officers should be consulted where units collect and
store dust from ranges that have been used for live firing that will
contain small amounts of un-burnt propellant.
c. Range Usage. The CLAW Regulations require that the number of
persons exposed should be reduced to a minimum. An indoor
range should therefore not be used for any purpose other than
weapon training or evaluation. Where it is absolutely necessary
for a range to be used for other purposes, the CFI must ensure
that it is free of surface dust prior to use.
Page 309 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.7 RANGE DESIGN
11.7.1 DESIGN CONCEPT
The design of indoor ranges must address each of the hazards listed in this chapter
as far as is reasonably practicable. The aim of the design should be to provide
sufficient fresh air into the range to ensure that lead particles and carbon monoxide
generated on the firing point(s) are taken clear of the breathing zone. It will not be
possible to take all lead dust out of the range as most will settle out between the
firing point and bullet catcher. The range envelope should be designed in such a
way to minimise air turbulence and have surfaces that are easily cleaned.
11.7.2 DESIGN SOLUTION
Each range will have different problems to address. Clearly the ideal solution is to
remove contaminants at source with local exhaust ventilation. Where this might be
possible in test ranges with fixed firing benches it will not be possible for variable
firing positions on several firing points. A combination of local control (directed
airflow) and dilution should be achievable in most circumstances.
11.7.3 AIR FLOW WITHIN THE RANGE
The ideal air flow is a laminar flow pulled down range with an extraction system
rated 10% greater than the inlet producing a negative pressure down range. The
optimum design to deliver steady air flows across a single firing point is to bring air
into the range through a full cross sectional laminar wall grill. This is clearly an
expensive proposition as such volumes of air will need to be heated. An alternative
solution is to provide positional grills behind the firers. Where firing takes place
from prone, kneeling and standing positions directional vents may provide the
Page 310 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
solution. All solutions should ensure there are no "dead zones" or excessive
turbulence generated within the range.
11.7.4 AIR SPEED
During trials it was observed that the greater the air speed over the firers the more
turbulence in front of the firers breathing zone. Optimum air speeds to minimise
such turbulence recorded were 0.15 - 0.2m/s. Air speeds of 0.1 m/s or less will not
provide sufficient fresh air in the range. The HSE recommend not less than
0.25m/s downrange. Air speeds in excess of 0.3m/s may need to be heated. In
ranges with more than one firing point it may be necessary to increase the air flow
at the rear of the range to ensure adequate air flow over the firing points down
range. Complex solutions involving intermediate air intakes should only be
considered in ranges that are heavily used on a daily basis. In low use ranges
where there is a simple fan input (single or multiple) and simple extract fan (single
or multiple) it is sufficient to ensure the fan is inputting air at the firing point and
extracting air at the target end. A wet hand or strand of cotton is all that is required
to check this. With these simple fans efficiency is not such an issue. Where there is
air handling plant, ductwork and filters the inspection of the air handling system
should be undertaken by competent mechanical engineers in accordance with the
manufactures recommendations.
11.7.5 AIR CHANGES
Domestic and office designs often revolve around the number of air changes per
hour to establish comfortable conditions. In ranges the issues are local air flow and
dilution. Air changes can of course be likened to dilution but it will not ensure local
airflow over the firing points has been achieved. It is expected that for most ranges
air change rates of between 6 - 10 changes/hr will deliver adequate dilution.
Page 311 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.8 AIR EXTRACTION
11.8.1 EXTRACTION SYSTEM
The air extraction system should provide an air extraction rate that is at least 10%
greater than the air input to assist in pulling a laminar air flow down range. The
extractor unit(s) will need to handle dust and unburnt propellant safely. Access for
maintenance and inspection is essential. Air systems are to be switched on 20
minutes before use of the range and left on 30 minutes after use to ensure the
systems are running to optimum capacity and that any residual dust is removed
from the system after firing ceases.
11.8.2 EXTRACT FILTER
The extract filter system where fitted must be suitable to hold unburned propellant
safely. Replacement instructions must be clearly displayed warning of the hazards
presented by filters containing lead dust and unburned propellant.
11.9 INSPECTION, CLEANING, HYGIENE, RECORDS AND SIGNS INSPECTION
11.9.1 INSPECTION OF RANGES USED FOR FIRING
Between the annual and independent inspections the CFI is to ensure the following
conditions are maintained:
a. The cleaning regime is effective. The cleaning regime must ensure
there is no accumulation of dust in the range. Any visible dust will
contain both lead and unburnt propellant.
Page 312 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
b. There are no areas to harbour dust. Equipment, material,
apertures or areas in the structure where dust may gather out of
sight are to be avoided.
c. The bullet catcher is maintained to ensure backsplash will not
result from attrition of the trap, a build up of bullets or bullets
captured in the anti backsplash curtain where fitted. Cleaning the
bullet trap including any anti backsplash curtain is to be
undertaken only by competent personnel or specialist contractors.
d. The ventilation system, when fitted, works correctly and filters
(where fitted) are checked and maintained at the intervals
recommended by the manufacture by contractors appointed by
the local works officers.
e. Any change in use of the range or any increase in the amount of
dust generated the CFI is to initiate a further risk assessment to
determine if this results in a change in the level of lead exposure.
11.9.2 DUST
The level of dust in the range is a matter of observation. Any dust generated from
the firing of weapons must be considered a hazard from lead and unburnt
propellant. Where this dust is gathered such as in a vacuum cleaner bag or
permitted to accumulate, it becomes an explosive hazard. Only authorised spark
free vacuum cleaners are to be used. Refer to TAS (RE) for details.
11.9.3 CONFINED SPACES
Inspectors may need to work in tubes and behind anti- splash curtains to complete
their inspection. In such cases inspectors should carry out a risk assessment to
Page 313 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
determine any additional control measures required by the Confined Spaces
Regulations. The risk assessment will also determine what Personal Protection
Equipment (PPE) will be necessary.
11.10 RANGE CLEANING
11.10.1 SCOPE
Maintaining a clean range is the single most effective way to ensure that the risk of
exposure to both lead and unburnt propellant are minimised. This section refers to
all types of indoor ranges including tube, test ranges and ranges with enclosed or
semi enclosed firing points. Ranges where dust from live firing is allowed to
accumulate in the working areas, firing point and on surfaces down range due to
inadequate cleaning will potentially expose users to significant levels of lead in air
and an explosive hazard.
11.10.2 FREQUENCY OF CLEANING
The frequency of cleaning will be dependent on how the range is used. Ranges used
only once or twice a week may need only a weekly clean. Range used more
frequently and firing more rounds may need cleaning after each use. The aim is to
ensure there is no build up of dust in the range working areas and this is a matter
of observation. Factors that will influence the frequency of cleaning necessary to
keep the work areas of the range free of visible dust include:
a. The type of ammunition fired, e.g. handguns firing unjacketed
ammunition will create a need for more frequent cleaning than
rifle. Handguns eject a considerable amount of unburnt propellant
and unjacketed ammunition will create more lead dust than
jacketed.
Page 314 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
b. The frequency of use and number of rounds fired.
c. The efficiency of ventilation and extraction.
d. The porosity of surfaces down range.
11.10.3 CLEANING METHODS
So as neither to create a risk from lead and unburnt propellant to cleaning staff or
other personnel nor to spread contamination, cleaning the range ceiling, floor and
walls, and adjoining rooms is to be by damp sweeping or, preferably, by a vacuum
cleaner approved specifically for indoor ranges and used in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Dry sweeping and dusting is strictly forbidden.
a. Routine Cleaning. Cleaning the range between deep cleans should
only be undertaken by staff with adequate PPE and who have
received sufficient training on the hazards in the range and use of
the PPE. It is essential to ensure the firing point and the area
behind and directly in front of the firing point is kept clean and
free of visible surface dust. Where it is necessary for firers to
move forward to targets, the range floor is also to be kept free of
dust. Routine cleaning should not include confined spaces or
restricted areas such as that between steel plate and anti splash
curtains. Where there are small tubes (<900mm diameter)
routine cleaning should extend as far as possible into the tube
with wet wipe without entering the tube. Routine cleaning should
include wet wipe of all exposed surfaces to remove any dust and
removal of any lead or debris build up in the trap area. Authorised
vacuum cleaners (see section 11.9.2 Dust on Page 312) may be
Page 315 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
used for the range floor and dependant upon type, vertical
surfaces in the range. All dust collected in authorised vacuum
cleaners is to be disposed of as a hazardous waste. Routine
cleaning should not include confined spaces or restricted areas
such as that between the steel plate and anti splash curtain
except in the following circumstances:
(1) Where staff ensure there is no build up of dust in the range
and trap area by cleaning all surfaces after each shoot
or regularly enough to ensure no accumulation of dust on
any surfaces.
(2) Where during the monthly inspections a build up of lead is
identified as generating a potential backsplash or ricochet
hazard or preventing the anti splash curtains from hanging
freely.
b. Deep Cleaning. Deep cleaning must be undertaken by specialist
contractors. Guidelines for deep cleaning contracts for ranges are
provided at Annex A to this chapter. Deep cleaning involves
removing all residual dust from the structure including roof
spaces, tubes; target and bullet trap area including any anti
backsplash curtains. It is sensible to de-lead and maintain bullet
traps just before a deep clean as this process can generate
considerable dust. A deep clean is necessary periodically
dependent upon range use. As a guide for non or semi jacketed
ammunition:
Page 316 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Total number of rounds fired Frequency of Deep Clean
0-10,000 rounds Every 2yrs
10,000 -20,000 rounds Annually
20,000+ Every 6mths
11.10.4 DUAL USE FACILITIES
CFI’s with dual use facilities must ensure that prior to the alternate use of the room
following use as a range; the surfaces are free of lead dust and unburnt propellant.
11.10.5 PERSONNEL INVOLVED IN CLEANING
Only competent personnel provided with PPE and adequate training on the hazards
involved and the use of the PPE should carry out cleaning in an indoor firing range.
At no stage should those cleaning ranges enter small tubes (<900mm dia.) unless
they are specialist contractors. Minors and women of childbearing capability must
not be involved in the cleaning of ranges.
11.10.6 WASTE DISPOSAL.
a. General. Waste generated from routine cleaning in low use (see
section 11.3.4 Level of Exposure to Lead on Page 305) and air
weapon ranges need not be treated as hazardous waste. Any
waste from a high use indoor range which may be contaminated
with lead and unburnt propellant is subjected to disposal in
accordance with the Hazardous Waste (England & Wales)
Regulations 2005 and Council Directive 2006/12/EC. It is not to
Page 317 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
be dumped or disposed of as ordinary waste but stored in sealed
containers for proper disposal. This includes:
(1) Water and other fluids from a bullet catcher.
(2) Sand from stop butts and bullet catchers.
(3) Vacuum cleaner waste bag contents and used filters.
(4) Ventilation filters.
b. Authorised Vacuum Cleaners. Vacuum cleaners are to be emptied
each time after use to avoid build up of potentially explosive dust.
Emptying vacuum cleaners should be conducted with extreme
care to avoid dust exposure to the individual and contamination of
the surrounding area.
c. Storage. The waste from ranges should be removed from the
range or stored dry in sealed containers and placed in a secure
area. Normal HAZMAT labelling should be used in accordance with
Chemicals (Hazard Information and Packaging for Supply)
Regulations 2009. Force Fire Officers will advise on the limits that
may be stored dependent on the storage facility.
d. Disposal. The Hazardous Waste (England and Wales) Regulations
2005 require sites producing hazardous waste to notify the
Environment Agency every 12 months. The regulations, together
with the List of Wastes (England) Regulations 2005, stipulate how
hazardous wastes should be classified and tracked during
movement. Transportation of hazardous waste must be
Page 318 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
undertaken by a registered carrier in accordance with the
Controlled Waste (Registration of Carriers and Seizure of
Vehicles) Regulations 1991 to a licensed hazardous waste
treatment or disposal facility.
11.11 HEALTH & HYGIENE
11.11.1 WASHING
Hand washing facilities are to be conveniently available as all who use the range
will come into contact with dust and range orders are to stipulate that hands are to
be washed on leaving the range.
11.11.2 EATING, DRINKING AND SMOKING
Eating, gum chewing, drinking and smoking are forbidden in an indoor training
range. All personnel are to be instructed that on leaving an indoor training range
not to eat drink or smoke until they have washed their hands. Permanent staff rest
room facilities may be provided separated from the range.
11.11.3 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
PPE, which is normally disposable coveralls, gloves and dust masks, may be
required for routine cleaning but must be worn for working, inspecting, maintaining
and cleaning in or around, bullet catchers that have accumulated lead dust. Re
usable PPE has to be maintained properly and facilities for its storage are to be
provided in accordance with PPE Regulations. Where disposable PPE is used, it
should be bagged after use and sealed for disposal by authorised contractors.
Page 319 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
11.11.4 ADDITIONAL MEASURES FOR MINORS
The CLAW Regulations require RAUs to ensure minors and women of childbearing
capacity receive particular care, supervision and training when exposed to lead in
air at any level. These are only pertinent for those exposed to significant levels of
lead in air and require medical surveillance.
11.12 KEEPING OF RECORDS
11.12.1 RECORDS
General: The dates of all assessments, maintenance, air monitoring, medical
surveillance (excluding health records of identifiable individuals) and
inspections of the range are to be recorded in the Land Range Log (police
Form 906). The reports and details are to be kept in the Range File for a
period of at least 5 years, as required by the current CLAW Regulations.
However the employer shall ensure that an adequate health record in respect
of each of his employees to who paragraph (1) applies is made and
maintained and that that record or a copy thereof is kept available in a
suitable form for at least 40 years from the date of the last entry made in it.
Monitoring: The user unit is to keep details of personnel who are exposed
to significant levels (>0.075mg/m3) of lead in air in an indoor range and the
period they were present. This may be a copy of the RASP. The records are to
be kept for 5 years and are subject to auditing.
Cleaning and De-leading: All cleaning and de-leading is to be recorded in
the Range Log (Form 906) together with the name, rank or job status of the
person responsible for the overall supervision.
Page 320 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Ventilation: The dates of inspections, checks and any failures or defects
found in the mechanical ventilation system if fitted are to be recorded with
the name of the inspector in the Range Log (Form 906).
Inspection and Audit: Records are to be available for inspection by
Independent Inspectors and, when required, by the enforcing authority (eg
HSE). The procedures for completing and auditing the range usage record are
to be stated in the range standing orders.
11.13 SAFETY SIGNS
11.13.1 SAFETY SIGNS
Hygiene and PPE signs– refer to Chapter 2.
Page 321 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Chapter 11 Annex A: Guidelines For Deep Cleaning Contracts
Typical Detail for a Range Deep Clean contract.
1. Essential Information to be passed to contractors where pertinent. a. Lead. All ranges contain significant levels of lead in the form of bullets, bullet fragments and dust. b. Un burnt Propellant. Dust in ranges will also contain un burnt propellant which is an explosive hazard when collected in any quantity. In ranges where only air pellets are fired this hazard should not exist. c. Antimony (Sb). In high use ranges that permit 7.62mm or similar ammunition to be fired there may be levels of Antimony in excess of EU recommended limits. d. Risk Assessment – Confined spaces. There are some ranges particularly where there are small tubes or box sections where the work environment may be classed as a confined space. In all cases it would not be safe to allow personnel to work alone nor allow access into small tubes unless there are personnel monitoring activity from outside the small tube or box section. 2. Requirements. a. Range Structure. All internal surfaces are to be free of dust. This includes any open roof structures, furniture and fixings. Surfaces that may absorb dust are to be pressure jetted where this is possible or vacuumed1. Particular care is required to clean out joints in any surface finishes. Mechanical scrubbing machines are particularly effective for use on floors. b. Bullet Trap. Cleaning bullet traps will be dependant upon the type of trap.
Page 322 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
i. Steel plate traps. Remove all bullet debris and wipe down all surfaces. This includes any antisplash curtain which may contain bullet debris and will be covered in fine lead dust. Buckled, loose or damaged steel surfaces should be reported to the authority. ii Snail traps. Remove all bullet debris and wipe down all surfaces. Empty and wash out any wet or dry collection chambers. Report any damage or distortion on impact surfaces to the authority. iii Granulated rubber or sand traps. Arrange for de leading prior to deep clean or combine with deep clean contract and ensure the de leading is completed prior to starting the deep clean. iv Lamella / curtain / Venetian traps. Remove all bullet debris and wipe down all visible surfaces. These traps should be dismantled if it is not easily determined that there is no build up within the trap. v. See approved vacuum specification. c. Baffles and vertical traps. Where baffles and vertical wall traps are sealed at the bottom, bullet debris will collect between the steel plate and the off set antisplash timber or tile. A deep cleaning contract should include removing any bullet debris from this gap. Baffles that show no indication of bullet strike may not need to be cleaned out. d. Electrical fittings. Dust is to be removed from all electrical fittings, lighting and any switch gear. Where there is an indication that dust is building up in or around any electrical fitting the authority is to be notified. e. Air handling plant and fans. All filters in air handling plant and fans are to be removed, cleaned or replaced in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All ductwork is to be cleaned through. Input and extract fan grills are to be removed and ducts, blades, grills and motors are to be cleaned free of dust. f. Requirement Tube Ranges. Small tubes or rectangular section ranges where it is not possible to enter the tube to deep clean are to be deep cleaned with methods that ensure all dust and bullet debris within the tube or box section is removed.
Page 323 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
3. Cleaning Guidelines. a. General. Deep cleaning contractors are to take every measure to avoid raising dust during cleaning operations. b. Ventilation. Any ventilation system in the range is to be run at full capacity during cleaning in the range. The ventilation system, once shut down at the end of cleaning operations is then to be cleaned as previously described. c. Cleaning methods. Dry sweeping is prohibited. Wash down, wet wipe limits airborne dust. d. Vacuums. Only approved spark free equipment is to be used in ranges with the exception of those ranges where only air pellets have been fired. ATEX equipment category 1D with T4 135°C; this is required as there is a Category B Zone 20 hazardous area, within the vacuum cleaner. See below for examples available at the time of writing. There may well be others not listed that meet the performance specification.
e. Cleaning small tube or box section ranges (where access is not possible). Below are some options that contractors might consider. i Pressure jetting the tube or box section would safely remove bullet debris and dust however the water will need to be collected and removed. ii Where pressure jetting is not possible and the target room could be sealed, the tubes or box sections can be dry brushed with a positive airflow directed down the tube. A vacuum/s at the target end inside the sealed space will take out the dust. Vacuum/s extract rate to exceed input air flow rate. Bullet debris can be collected once the dust has settled at the target end.
4. PPE. The deep cleaning contractor is responsible to assess the hazards in a particular range and provide all operatives involved with adequate PPE and instruction in its proper use.
5. Compliance with Regulations. The contractor is to ensure full compliance with the CLAW Regulations for all work undertaken within the range and the Hazardous Waste (England and Wales) Regulations 2005 regarding all waste disposals from the range.
6. Form 906 / Certification. On completion of the works the authority is to confirm that all scheduled work has been completed and the contractor is to sign the Range Log Form 906 to certify that the deep clean has been completed.
Page 324 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 12: Weapon Unloading Facilities (Wuf)
12.1 INTRODUCTION
Although SA unloading facilities are not ranges, they have been included in this
Volume for convenience. This Chapter describes their construction.
12.2 Purpose
Police officers and patrols carrying loaded SA require an area for safe loading and
unloading drills. The unloading bays described in this Chapter are intended for all
Police SA used in accordance with established drills under supervision.
12.3 Limitations
As the unloading facility is intended to capture the occasional round which has been
fired unintentionally, the danger from backsplash cannot be eliminated due to the
proximity of the firer to the sand. The unloading facility is not to be used for testing
or any other deliberate firing of a SA.
12.4 UNLOADING FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
12.4.1 SITING
Unloading facilities are intended for outdoor use but may be inside a building if
there is no other option. The prime consideration in siting is convenience of use.
Ideally the facility should be built against the wall of an existing brick building with
no windows or doors close by but it is essential that the back wall of the facility is
Page 325 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
built and that the bullet catcher is not simply built against an existing wall.
Instructions for use where required are derived from local risk assessment.
12.4.2 FACILITY MATERIALS
The facility may be constructed in any form providing the ballistic safety
requirements of this Chapter are met.
12.4.3 BULLET CATCHER
The permanent unloading facility normally includes a sand or rubber bullet catcher,
details of which are given in Chapter 2. It is essential to safety that the correct
grade of sand or rubber is used and maintained in a loose state at an angle of 34º
(600 mils). The sand or rubber profile has to be maintained to the levels marked on
the facility's side and back walls. For low velocity weapons .22 in, 9mm, the depth
required to contain a round is 750 mm(S) 500 mm(C), for high velocity weapons
the depth should be 1000mm(S) 900 mm(C). The depth can be achieved by
elevating the standing position for unloading, so that the barrel is pointed down at
an angle into the sand unloading facility. A low velocity bullet catcher must be
clearly signed detailing which weapons are permitted.
12.4.4 CLADDING
As an additional safety feature, the walls are timber clad, which reduces but does
not eliminate danger if struck.
Page 326 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
12.5 PORTABLE UNLOADING FACILITY
It is recognised that sand unloading facilities are permanent structures not well-
suited to changing operational conditions. Any portable unloading facility must meet
the requirements set out in section 12.4.1 Siting on Page 324. Details of portable
Weapon Unloading Facilities may be obtained from TAS (RE).
12.6 DESIGN
To be safe a WUF must meet the following criteria.
1. Capture without penetration, ricochet or backsplash all rounds that
might be fired into it. HPRS Volume 2 provides material performance
details.
2. The bullet impact area must be large enough to eliminate the chance of
a bullet striking anything other than the trap, or
3. The muzzle is fully contained in a tube or flared aperture. If a tube is
used, consideration must be given to venting muzzle blast.
4. The design must be intrinsically safe, no hidden attrition. Weapons held
in the unload position point naturally at the intended point of impact.
5. Where pistols are to be unloaded the design must take account of the
unloading drills in that the muzzle may be drawn back during the
unload.
Page 327 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
FIGURE 12-1: SAND FILLED LOADING BAY
Page 328 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
CHAPTER 13: CONTROL OF NOISE FROM SMALL ARMS RANGES
13.1 INTRODUCTION
This Chapter provides advice on environmental noise related issues as they relate
to small arms ranges. The Chapter is primarily aimed at those producing
justifications for works related to noise reduction around ranges and those with
management responsibility for these types of facilities so they have some insight
into the issues and more particularly the control measures available and covers:
a. Introduction.
b. Noise at Work.
c. Environmental Noise from ranges.
d. Engineering controls for environmental noise from ranges.
13.2 NOISE AT WORK.
Noise in relation to small arms ranges involves protection for those exposed to
muzzle blast peak noise levels dealt with under the Control of Noise at Work Regs.
(CNWR).
13.2.1 INDOOR RANGES
Engineering solutions to minimise the effect of noise are only possible in indoor
ranges or where there are enclosed firing points. When analysing the acoustic
properties of a room, the sound arriving at the ears, can be considered under 3
headings:
Page 329 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
a. Direct Sound. This is the sound which travels directly from the source to the
listener. It is the first sound to reach the listener, having travelled by the
shortest route at a velocity of approximately 340m/s. Hearing protection is
the only means of providing protection from direct sound.
b. Early Sound Reflections. Shortly after the direct sound arrives, the listener
receives a series of sound wave fronts which have been reflected one or more
times from the walls, ceiling and any other reflective surfaces in the room.
These wave fronts have taken a longer path than the direct sound and
therefore arrive later. The later they arrive, the greater their potential for
interfering with speech intelligibility. Angled baffles deflect noise away from
the firing point. Open texture materials can absorb noise and there are many
proprietary noise reduction surface finishes that are suitable for use in ranges
– i.e. they do not absorb dust
c. Reverberation. Sound wave fronts are repeatedly reflected from the
room surfaces and, as a result of absorption, gradually grow weaker and
weaker. Acoustic surfaces in a firing room will ensure reverberation is
minimised.
13.3 ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE
13.3.1 THE ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUE
Noise is a particular issue for the Police. Training requires realistic conditions which
include live and blank firing on ranges and training areas, blast vibrations from
firing, pyrotechnic effects, and the use of weapon firing simulators and other
similar operations. Night exercises are also essential training activities that must be
carried out regularly if the Police are to remain effective, this may be intrusive,
especially at night. Noise can also be generated from non-training activities at
Page 330 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
offices and establishments. Road vehicles are a very pervasive source of noise
(and vibration) in the environment, and heavy vehicle movements may be
intrusive, again, especially at night.
13.3.2 THE NUGENT RULE (HISTORICAL REFERENCE)
Distance is the most cost effective reduction measure available as well argued in
the Report extracted below.
Report of the Defence Lands Committee 1971-73 by The Right Hon. Lord Nugent of
Guilford.
Noise
8.33 We first examined the measures the Services are already taking to mitigate the effects of noisy activities. We learned that steps have been taken, at an airfield
where noise problems are particularly severe, to buy surrounding land to ensure
that the areas most affected are not developed. This policy of sterilization can, in special cases, make a worthwhile contribution to the reduction of noise nuisance to
the public; though it involves the acquisition of more defence land, this land can usually be productively used for agricultural purposes.
Buffer Zones
8.34 We considered whether this policy might have wider applications. In
particular, we had in mind the fact that the noise problem which already exists at firing ranges and training areas close to urban areas is likely to get worse as
housing and other developments advance closer to the Service sites, even though the volume of noise may not increase. We hold very strongly that this is a matter
which needs to be tackled now, and consider that if ‘buffer zones’ were introduced between sites where firing takes place and civilian developments, the worst
features of this noise problem could be contained, and in some measure mitigated.
We recognize that this poses problems for local authorities as well as the Home Office we recommend that it should be tackled jointly, with give and take on both
sides. Existing dispositions and problems of land acquisition make it unlikely that this policy can be universally applied, but we would propose its adoption wherever
practicable.
Page 331 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
13.4 NOISE SOURCE
13.4.1 SOUND IN THE OPEN AIR.
As an observer moves away from a sound source, the sound pressure level
diminishes. The rate which this occurs depends on the nature of the source itself
and this principle is true as long as the observer is not too close. Most practical
situations may be described in terms of two ‘ideal’ sources: point sources and line
sources.
a. Point Source. The sound source is represented by a point and sound is
radiated equally from it in all directions. Every time the distance from a point
source is doubled, the level decreases by 6dB. A point source, such as a
weapon, which produces a level of 130dB at 10m will produce a level of
124dB at 20m. At a distance of 30m, the level will have fallen by 10dB. In
other words, when the distance is trebled, the loudness is halved.
b. Line Source. A line source, such as a military convoy, which
produces a level of 70dB at 10m, will produce 67dB at 20m. For
a 10Db reduction, half as loud as the level at 10m, the observer
must retreat to a distance of approximately 100m from the
source or ten times the original distance.
Page 332 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
13.5 NATURAL DISSIPATION
13.5.1 ATTENUATION IN OPEN AIR
Attenuation due to distance has already been discussed. Wind and temperature
gradients also effect sound. Sound travels faster in air as the temperature
increases. The absolute speed also
increases with wind speed (downwind propagation).
13.5.2 ATTENUATION FROM EXISTING SCREENS AND BARRIERS
In addition to the effect climate has on sound, there are often buildings or similar
objects which lie between the source and the observer and prevent line of sight
between them. When a sound wave meets an obstacle like a fence or a building, a
proportion of it is reflected, and the rest of the wave carries on past the edge of the
obstacle. However, the ‘bare’ edge of a sound wave cannot sustain itself in free
space - the vibrating air molecules at the end start themselves to act like sources
and radiate in all directions. The result is, that a sound wave which has passed the
obstacle, bends or diffracts round it into the shadow zone behind the obstacle.
13.6 NATURAL & ENGINEERING CONTROLS
13.6.1 DISTANCE
This is a simple inverse square law relationship, which at frequencies between 300-
600 Hz, would give attenuations of 66 dB and 68 dB at 1500 metres and 1650
metres respectively.
Page 333 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
13.6.2 GROUND ABSORPTION
Sound travelling close to grass covered ground is attenuated as follows:
Ground Absorption Frequency (Hz) 37-75 75-150 150-300 300-600 600-1200 Attenuation (dB)
1500 4-5 15-0 34-0 45-0 34-0 Distance from sound source in metres 1650 5-0 16-5 38-0 50-0 38-0
13.6.3 TREES
When trees are sufficiently dense, so as to mask a white moving object at 60
metres, the following attenuations apply:
ATTENUATION FROM TREES
Frequency (Hz) 37-75 75-150 150- 300 300-600 600-1200
Attenuation (dB 2 3 5 6 7
13.6.4 EARTH BANKS
Although these block the direct path of sound between weapon and complaint area,
earth banks have a complicated effect:
a. For example, the attenuation due to banks at 3 metres and 30
metres from the weapon would be 18dB and 9dB respectively. Should
the side of the bank nearest the weapon be vertical the above
attenuation would be reduced.
Page 334 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
b. A bank may however cut out, or reduce, the sound travelling
close to the ground and hence reduce the ground absorption by
about half. To gain 18dB attenuation by means of a bank 3 metres
from the weapon, one could therefore lose between 22dB and 25dB
attenuation in lost ground absorption. This effect is uncertain,
especially where the ground cover is bushy rather than grassy.
c. The effect of a bank and its likely effect on ground absorption may be
summarised as follows:
ATTENUATION FROM EARTH BANKS Frequency (Hz) 37-75 75-150 150-300 300-600 600-1200 Attenuation (dB) Attenuation due to bank (dB) (Bank sited at 3m from weapon)
9 12 15 18 21
At 1500m 2.3 7.5 17 22.5 17 Loss of ground absorption, in dB, due to bank
At 1650m 2.5
8.3 19 25 19
13.6.5 WIND AND TURBULENCE
Turbulence at the top of a wall may assist the sound to diffract over the wall and
reduce the dB’s of attenuation as follows:
ATTENUATION FROM WIND Frequency (Hz) 37-75 75-150 150-300 300-600 600-1200 Attenuation (dB)
8kph 0db 0db 0db 0db 0db 16kph 0db 0db 1db 2db 4db
Wind Speed at: 32kph 1db 3db 6db 8db 10db
Page 335 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
13.6.6 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
A figure of 3dB attenuation has been taken as typical for temperate summer limatic
conditions. The figure represents atmospheric absorption at low frequencies. At
high frequencies absorption will be much higher, so much so that high frequency
nuisance over these sample distances can be ignored.
13.6.7 TEMPERATURE GRADIENTS
These have effects like those of wind gradients and, similarly, are not as yet
capable of prediction. An inversion may increase sound transmission but it is not
known how often this condition may be obtained in any given locale. However at
least it could not be combined with the adverse wind direction mentioned above.
13.6.8 THEORETICAL PREDICTION
An example is given below of a theoretical prediction of sound attenuation, at
distances of 1500 metres and 1650 metres for 7.62mm ammunition. As high
frequencies, ie above 1000 Hz, will be unimportant in the case of small arms, the
octave 300-600 Hz is used in the example.
Page 336 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Attenuation for sounds in the 300-600 Hz octave
Distances from Weapon 1500 metres 1650 metres
Without Bank
With Bank Without Bank
With Bank See para:
dB dB dB dB Distance 13.6.1 66 66 68 68 Ground absorption 13.6.2 45 22.5 50 25 Trees 13.6.3 6 6 6 6 Earth bank 3 m from weapon 13.6.4 - 18 - 18 Wind and Turbulence (assumed 32 kph)
13.6.5 -8 -8 -8 -8
Temperate and Relative Humidity
13.6.6 3 3 3 3
TOTAL Attenuation 112dB 107.5dB 119dB 112dB
The sound peak pressure, at the weapon, for the SLR/7.62 ammunition is 159dB.
From the table above, it can be seen that at 1500 metres from the weapon the
sound peak pressure would be:
a. With Bank (159 -107.5) = 51.5dB.
b. Without Bank (159 -112) = 47dB.
These levels would be barely detectable in an average room and certainly not
outside in a normal urban environment. It is emphasised that while these figures
are theoretical, they were found to agree, within plus or minus 10%, with sound
measurements taken in a similar situation.
13.7 GERMAN RANGE NOISE BAFFLE SOLUTIONS
In 1991 Germany, the US and UK combined to develop means of reducing noise
from tank test facilities, armoured and artillery ranges with fixed firing points and
fixed small arms ranges. The methods included absorbing noise walls, barriers,
both vertical and earth banks and for the first time open box units mounted above
Page 337 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
the firing points and in some cases, ranges. These measures achieved considerable
reductions in audible noise beyond the firing points.
Page 338 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Chapter 13 Annex A.
MEASUREMENTS OF PEAK PRESSURE LEVELS (Db) AND PULSE DURATION
(MILLISECONDS) FOR TYPICAL WEAPON SYSTEMS
EAR POSITION SER WEAPON/AMMUNITION FIRER LOADER INSTRUCTOR OR ADJACENT
PERSONNEL 0.3m to
Side 1.2m Side
3.0m Side
dB ms dB ms dB ms dB ms dB ms (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) 1 SLR/7.62mm Live 0.3M above Ground 160 5.0 - - - - - - - - 1.5M above Ground 151 0.9 - - 169 0.5 16
0 0.5 155 0.5
SLR/7.62 Blank 150 10.0
- - - - - - - -
2 SA80/5.56mm Live 158 - - - - - - - - - 3 Colt Armalite/5.56mm
Live 151
1.0 - - 165 1.0 155
0.5 153 0.5
4 MG/9mm Live 157 1.0 - - 162 1.0 154
0.5 151 0.5
5 GPMG/7.62mm Live 162 - - - - - - - - -
6 Shotgun/12 bore 155 5.0 - - - - - - - -
7 Pistol/0.38 inch 157 5.0 - - - - - - - -
8 Pistol/9mm Live 157 1.0 - - - - - - - -
9 Rifle/0.22 inch 138 2.5 - - - - 132
2.5 - -
Note:
1. The pulse duration is the total time taken for the pressure fluctuations
to decay by 20 dB from the peak pressure level.
Page 339 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
Chapter 13 Annex B.
NOISE SURVEY RESULTS FOR A TYPICAL HIGH VELOCITY INDOOR TUBE
RANGE
1. Frequency Analysis - 5.56mm Ball.
Hz 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
dB 127 138 140 145 151 144 147 145
2. 5.56mm 5 rounds Single Shot.
Max Peak 158 157 157 156 157
IEL2 - 143 143 143 144
3. 5.56mm Rapid Fire.
Max Peak 158 158 158 157 158
IEL 145 144 144 144 145
4. Frequency Analysis - 7.62mm Ball.
Hz 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
dB 129 140 148 148 148 150 150 150
5. 7.62mm 5 rounds Single Shot.
Max Peak 159 160 161 160 161
IEL 144 144 141 142 144
2 IEL - Impulse Exposure Level.
Page 340 of 340 Handbook of Police Range Safety. Vol 2.
Design, Construction, And Maintenance Of Small Arms Weapon System Ranges
Version 4.4 © ACPO NPIA 2012
6. 7.62mm Rapid Fire.
Max Peak 162 160 160 160 158
IEL 149 145 144 141 142
7. Reverberation Time of Range Tested = 1.016 seconds.